Docstoc

attachment-0001_8_

Document Sample
attachment-0001_8_ Powered By Docstoc
					    Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                       Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                       Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                               Change Needed

    MUN-69992        3       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase     Roles - Purchase Orders Roles         sprolemt                                         The Allow 'Select All' in PO Receiving check box is Required
                             Orders                                                                                                                        available. When you select this check box, users
                                                                                                                                                           assigned to the role are able to use the Select All
                                                                                                                                                           option in the Purchase Order Receiving program.
                                                                                                                                                           The default value for new or existing roles is not
                                                                                                                                                           selected.
    MUN-61445        3       Professional Services - Professional   Department Parameters, Work Orders wmjnlpst, wmmstmnt,                                 The Work Orders module now allows chargeback Required
                             Services                                                                  wmdtlmnt, wminvent, wmtiment,                       work orders to assign distribution codes at the cost
                                                                                                       wmpspent, wmdtglmt,                                 detail level.
                                                                                                       wmsrcnvt, wmsvcreq                                  Distribution codes can be updated or applied to an
                                                                                                                                                           existing work order, as long as no general ledger
                                                                                                                                                           accounts have been assigned to the work order.
                                                                                                                                                           In order to activate this change, you must select
                                                                                                                                                           the Allow Distribution Codes on Costs check box in
                                                                                                                                                           Department Parameters.
                                                                                                                                                           Specific users can be restricted from applying
                                                                                                                                                           distribution codes when converting a service
                                                                                                                                                           request. This is done by selecting the Distribution
                                                                                                                                                           Codes check box in Work Orders Roles.


    MUN-72076        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines                  Roles - Accounts Receivable Roles     sprolemt                                         The Deposit Numbers on Payment Batches list is Required
                                                                                                                                                           available. The options on this list are as follows:
                                                                                                                                                           - Always Required - When you select this option, a
                                                                                                                                                           deposit number is always required when users
                                                                                                                                                           assigned to the role create a payment batch.
                                                                                                                                                           - Required on Post - When you select this option, a
                                                                                                                                                           deposit number is required when users assigned to
                                                                                                                                                           the role post a payment batch.
                                                                                                                                                           - Not Required - When you select this option, a
                                                                                                                                                           deposit number is not required when users
                                                                                                                                                           assigned to the role create or post a payment
                                                                                                                                                           batch.
                                                                                                                                                           The default value for this list is Always Required.

                                                                                                                                                           The title of the Maintain AR Parameter Record
                                                                                                                                                           check box is now Maintain AR Settings.
                                                                                                                                                           The title of the Maintain AR Customer Records
                                                                                                                                                           check box is now Maintain AR Customers.
                                                                                                                                                           The title of the View SSN list is now View
                                                                                                                                                           Customer SSN/FIDs.
                                                                                                                                                           The title of the View DOB check box is now View
                                                                                                                                                           Customer Dates of Birth.
                                                                                                                                                           The title of the View Driver's License check box is
                                                                                                                                                           now View Customer Driver's Licenses.
                                                                                                                                                           The title of the View EFT Data check box is now
                                                                                                                                                           View Customer EFT Accounts.
                                                                                                                                                           The title of the Post Lockbox Payments check box
                                                                                                                                                           is now Process Lockbox Payment Files.
                                                                                                                                                           The title of the Misc Cash Access to GL check box
                                                                                                                                                           is now Access GL Accounts on Miscellaneous
                                                                                                                                                           Payments.
                                                                                                                                                           The title of the Post to Cash Receipts Journal
    MUN-52794        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines                  Roles - Munis System Roles            spmaudit, sprolemt                               The Delete Audits check box is of Receipt
                                                                                                                                                           check box is now Allow Posting available. When        Required
                                                                                                                                                           you select this check box, users assigned to the
                                                                                                                                                           role are able to purge or delete audit records in the
                                                                                                                                                           System Changes Audit program. The default value
                                                                                                                                                           is cleared, and you must select this check box for
                                                                                                                                                           any roles assigned to users who should be able to
                                                                                                                                                           delete or purge audit records.




1                                                                                                   d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                       (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
    Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                       Primary Program                        Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                        Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Change Needed

    MUN-70684        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts         Accounts Receivable Settings,          arrctpst, arparmnt                                 The Update GL list is available on the Payments      Optional
                             Receivable                             Payments Journal                                                                          tab of the Category Specific Options screen. This
                                                                                                                                                              list indicates whether or not payment processing
                                                                                                                                                              programs that post payments through the
                                                                                                                                                              Payments Journal program should update the
                                                                                                                                                              general ledger during processing.
                                                                                                                                                              For all but AR category 02 - Misc Cash Receipt,
                                                                                                                                                              you can select Yes or No from the list.
                                                                                                                                                              For AR category 02 - Misc Cash Receipt, the For
                                                                                                                                                              Selected Payment Types option is also available.
                                                                                                                                                              When you select this option and click Accept, the
                                                                                                                                                              program displays a list of the selected
                                                                                                                                                              miscellaneous payment types and a Selected
                                                                                                                                                              button which shows the number of types currently
                                                                                                                                                              selected.
                                                                                                                                                              You can click the button to display the
                                                                                                                                                              Miscellaneous Payment Types screen, click
                                                                                                                                                              Update, and then clear or select the check boxes
                                                                                                                                                              to refine the list of payment types for which you
                                                                                                                                                              want the payment processing programs to update
                                                                                                                                                              the general ledger.




    MUN-70683        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts         Payment Entry, Payments Journal        arcshrct, arrctpst                                 The option selected from the Deposit Number on       Optional
                             Receivable                                                                                                                       Payment Batches list for a particular role on the
                                                                                                                                                              Accounts Receivable Roles screen in the System
                                                                                                                                                              Administration - Roles program determines
                                                                                                                                                              whether or not a deposit number on a payment
                                                                                                                                                              batch is required during payment entry, payments
                                                                                                                                                              journal processing, or both.
                                                                                                                                                              The permission options include the following:
                                                                                                                                                              • Always Required—This option indicates that a
                                                                                                                                                              deposit number is required during payment batch
                                                                                                                                                              entry. The program validates the deposit number at
                                                                                                                                                              the time of posting.
                                                                                                                                                              • Required to Post—This option indicates that the
                                                                                                                                                              deposit number can be omitted during payment
                                                                                                                                                              batch entry, but is required at the time of posting.
                                                                                                                                                              • Not Required—This option indicates that the
                                                                                                                                                              deposit number is not required during payment
                                                                                                                                                              batch entry. The program does not validate the
                                                                                                                                                              deposit number at the time of posting. This is the
                                                                                                                                                              default functionality.
                                                                                                                                                              Depending on the permission requirements of a
                                                                                                                                                              role, the Payment Entry and Payments Journal
                                                                                                                                                              programs display warning messages if a deposit
                                                                                                                                                              number is required and display error messages if a
                                                                                                                                                              deposit number is found to be incorrect during
                                                                                                                                                              validation.

    MUN-57387        3       Accounts Receivable - General Billing General Billing Settings, Invoice Entry arrctpst, gbparmnt, gbinvent                       The Update General Ledger check box is available Optional
                                                                   and Proof, Invoices                                                                        under Miscellaneous on the General Billing
                                                                                                                                                              Settings screen. If this check box is selected, it
                                                                                                                                                              directs the Invoice Entry and Proof and Invoices
                                                                                                                                                              programs to update the general ledger during
                                                                                                                                                              invoice processing. If this check box is cleared, the
                                                                                                                                                              programs process invoices without creating
                                                                                                                                                              general ledger journal entries.
                                                                                                                                                              This check box is selected by default.
    MUN-71353        3       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets         Depreciate Assets, Sub-Class Codes fasubmnt, fadeprec                                     The Depreciate Assets program can now                 Optional
                                                                                                                                                              depreciate based on an asset's average value for
                                                                                                                                                              the year.




2                                                                                                   d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                          (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
    Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                     Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                      Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                              Change Needed

    MUN-54871        3       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Accounts Payable Settings, Invoice    apparmnt, apvdrmnt, apinvent                       Accounts Payable Settings allows you to select      Optional
                             Payable                              Entry, Vendors                                                                           from a range of options to take when a vendor's W-
                                                                                                                                                           9 form has not been received. You can select Hold,
                                                                                                                                                           None, Stop, and Warn actions.
                                                                                                                                                           The Vendors program no longer allows the W-9
                                                                                                                                                           Received check box to be set to No when the
                                                                                                                                                           vendor has invoices in proof, and the Accounts
                                                                                                                                                           Payable Settings W-9 option is set to Hold or Stop.
                                                                                                                                                           The program also generates a notification
                                                                                                                                                           message when the W-9 Received check box is set
                                                                                                                                                           to Yes, and the vendor has invoices awaiting
                                                                                                                                                           approval.
                                                                                                                                                           Invoice Entry now abides by the new W-9 settings
                                                                                                                                                           in Accounts Payable Settings.

    MUN-63150        3       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Purchase Card Import, Purchase Card                                                      The Purchase Card Import program now imports       Optional
                             Payable                              Statements                                                                               files in the format used by Madison, WI.
                                                                                                                                                           The Purchase Cards, and Purchase Card
                                                                                                                                                           Statements programs are now available. The
                                                                                                                                                           Purchase Cards program allows you to maintain
                                                                                                                                                           purchasing card information and records. The
                                                                                                                                                           Purchase Card Statements program allows you to
                                                                                                                                                           view, release and approve purchase card
                                                                                                                                                           statements, as well as update transactions,
                                                                                                                                                           allocate statements, and convert statements to
                                                                                                                                                           unposted invoices.

    MUN-67055        3       Payroll - Payroll                    Deduction and Benefit Master,         prdedmst, prgended, prpdcalc                       When the value of the Calc Code list is Calc Code Optional
                                                                  Generate Deductions (link routine),                                                      32 - Percent by Years of Service and you click the
                                                                  Calculate Pays (line routine)                                                            folder button, the program displays the Assign
                                                                                                                                                           Years of Service screen, where you can define
                                                                                                                                                           additional date options to use when determining
                                                                                                                                                           seniority and define the range of time in months or
                                                                                                                                                           years. The deduction exception code 9 - Take No
                                                                                                                                                           More Than Empe Amounts has been added to
                                                                                                                                                           allow a definition of deductions applicable to the
                                                                                                                                                           calc code 32 - Percent by Years of Service
                                                                                                                                                           deduction when determining whether an amount
                                                                                                                                                           should be contributed for the calc code 32
                                                                                                                                                           deduction and whether the amount is below the
                                                                                                                                                           matching limit as determined by employee
                                                                                                                                                           amounts from deductions listed on the Exceptions
                                                                                                                                                           screen.




3                                                                                                d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                         (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
    Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                      Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                         Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                             Change Needed

    MUN-59672        2       Payroll - Payroll                Multiple Payroll Programs            prjournl, praccact, pradvreg,                       The Accrued Expense Payroll Processing               Optional
                                                                                                   prarxtra, praudlnk, prbalsht,                       programs (Munis Application Menu > Human
                                                                                                   prchecks, prckreg, prctlfi8,                        Resources Payroll > Payroll > Payroll Processing
                                                                                                   prcumagm, prdedmst, prdedrpt,                       > Accrued Expense Payroll Processing) allows you
                                                                                                   prdistrp, prempupd, prencupd,                       to expense salary and employer deduction
                                                                                                   preschls, prgenddp, prntaken,                       contributions to the fiscal year where the salary
                                                                                                   prpayact, prprocve, prpyddpf,                       was earned, while accruing these expenses to
                                                                                                   prpyrlfm, prstatus, prtaxreg,                       previously defined payable accounts (not cash).
                                                                                                   prtimatt                                            You can then generate regular payrolls to include
                                                                                                                                                       these accrued expenses to be paid out in the fiscal
                                                                                                                                                       year, which is different from when amounts were
                                                                                                                                                       earned. In these payrolls, the payable accounts are
                                                                                                                                                       debited in place of the expense and a credit is
                                                                                                                                                       issued to the cash account.
                                                                                                                                                       The records created from an accrued expense
                                                                                                                                                       payroll do not write to the earning history and
                                                                                                                                                       deduction history tables; instead, during the
                                                                                                                                                       Employee Update process, the accrued expense
                                                                                                                                                       payroll writes to the year-end accruals payroll
                                                                                                                                                       (pryeeapp) and year end accruals deduction
                                                                                                                                                       (pryeeapd) tables. These records can be viewed in
                                                                                                                                                       the Year End Accrued Expense Inquiry program.
                                                                                                                                                       Prior to creating any accrued expense payrolls,
                                                                                                                                                       you must set up the expense account to payable
                                                                                                                                                       account crosswalk for both pay and deductions
                                                                                                                                                       based on fund. Within the Control and Run Control
                                                                                                                                                       program, use the Salary Payable and Deduction
    MUN-69016        2       Payroll - Payroll                Payroll Control Settings, General    prjournl, prencumb                                  In the Payroll Control Settings program for the GL Optional
                                                              Ledger Distribution Journal,                                                             Posting category, the Post Encumbered Amounts
                                                              Encumbrance Proof/Post                                                                   by Budget or By Actual offers two values: A-Post
                                                                                                                                                       Encumbered Amounts by Actual and B-Post
                                                                                                                                                       Encumbered Amounts by Budget. If you select B-
                                                                                                                                                       Post Encumbered Amounts by Budget, the General
                                                                                                                                                       Ledger Distribution Journal program allows
                                                                                                                                                       encumbrance amounts to be relieved as part of the
                                                                                                                                                       journal posting process. When you choose to
                                                                                                                                                       encumber by budget, the journal program keep
                                                                                                                                                       tracks of encumbered salary amounts, as well as
                                                                                                                                                       encumbered employer deduction expenses, for
                                                                                                                                                       inclusion in the journal and the post to the general
                                                                                                                                                       ledger. When the By Budget option is selected and
                                                                                                                                                       you open the Encumbrance Proof/Post program, it
                                                                                                                                                       displays a warning that you are currently posting
                                                                                                                                                       encumbrances by budget during the payroll journal
                                                                                                                                                       process and that if you also process using the
                                                                                                                                                       Encumbrance Proof/Post program, incorrect
                                                                                                                                                       encumbrance amounts may result.


    MUN-59977        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Personnel Settings, Employee         pmparmnt, premppay,                                 In the Personnel Settings program, the Hiring          Optional
                                                              Job/Salary                           pmparamsio                                          Freeze in Employee/Job Salary list is available. If
                                                                                                                                                       the value of this list is Not Allow Positions, and the
                                                                                                                                                       Hiring Freeze check box is also selected in the
                                                                                                                                                       Position Control program, the program does not
                                                                                                                                                       allow you to continue adding a position in
                                                                                                                                                       Employee Job/Salary. If the value of this list is
                                                                                                                                                       Warn when Applying Positions, the program
                                                                                                                                                       displays a warning but allows you to continue.




4                                                                                            d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                           (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
    Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                       Primary Program                      Affected Program(s)               Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Change Needed

    MUN-67891        3       Professional Services - Professional   Position Control, Pay Master, Payroll pjbuddet, pjcalsal, pjjobval,                        The Budget tab contains the Actual FTE Count box       Optional
                             Services                               Control Settings, Projection Start and pjposval, pjprojct, pjsetrun,                       for the Current Year, and the Budgeted FTE Max
                                                                    Status                                 pminsprc, pmposctl, pradddel,                       and Actual FTE Count boxes for the Last Year. The
                                                                                                           prallmnt, prbenann, prcatmen,                       Actual FTE Count value is set using the Calc FTE
                                                                                                           prdetail, prdpddfm, prempded,                       menu option. When you click Calc FTE, the
                                                                                                           premphis, prempinq, premppay,                       program prompts you to calculate the current
                                                                                                           premprec, prempsub,                                 record or all records in the active set. The
                                                                                                           prgended, prgenemp, prinsded,                       calculate function totals the position's active
                                                                                                           prjobcls, prmaster                                  (current date falls within the start/end dates and
                                                                                                                                                               the status is active) for all base pay records where
                                                                                                                                                               the pay type is identified to be included in the FTE
                                                                                                                                                               calc.
                                                                                                                                                               The Actual FTE Count box cannot be manually
                                                                                                                                                               maintained.
                                                                                                                                                               The Last Year Budgeted FTE Max and Actual FTE
                                                                                                                                                               Count boxes are only accessible by a user with
                                                                                                                                                               Personnel superuser permissions.
                                                                                                                                                               The Max Employees box is expanded from a small
                                                                                                                                                               integer to a decimal(8,4).
                                                                                                                                                               The option to import a .csv file is available for
                                                                                                                                                               updating the budgeted/requested maximum
                                                                                                                                                               records.
                                                                                                                                                               The Pay Master program includes the Include in
                                                                                                                                                               Position FTE Calc check box, which is only
                                                                                                                                                               accessible for category code 1 pay types.
                                                                                                                                                               In the Payroll Control Settings program, the Allow
                                                                                                                                                               Position to Exceed Budgeted Max option is
    MUN-57848        3       Revenues - Permits                     Application Entry                    piappent                                              The permit export includes the value of the            Optional
                                                                                                                                                               customer's Name 2 field.
    MUN-29521        3       Revenues - Permits                     Application Entry                                                                          You are able to enter amounts with up to 4 decimal     Optional
                                                                                                                                                               places in the Stat Amount box on the Fees tab on
                                                                                                                                                               the Application Permits screen.
    MUN-70666        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines                  Roles - Accounts Payable Roles       sprolemt                                              The Allow Vendor Remit Maintenance check box is        Optional
                                                                                                                                                               available on the Role Permissions tab on the
                                                                                                                                                               Accounts Payable Roles screen. When you select
                                                                                                                                                               this check box, users assigned to the role are able
                                                                                                                                                               to maintain remit addresses for vendors, even if he
                                                                                                                                                               or she does not have permission to maintain
                                                                                                                                                               vendors.
                                                                                                                                                               The Allow Vendor 1099 Maintenance check box is
                                                                                                                                                               available on the Role Permissions tab on the
                                                                                                                                                               Accounts Payable Roles screen. When you select
                                                                                                                                                               this check box, users assigned to the role are able
                                                                                                                                                               to maintain 1099 information for vendors, even if
                                                                                                                                                               he or she does not have permission to maintain
                                                                                                                                                               vendors.
                                                                                                                                                               The default value of this check box for new or
                                                                                                                                                               existing roles is not selected.




5                                                                                                 d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                               (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
    Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module        Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                       Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                Change Needed

    MUN-70547        2       SP-Tech - SP Routines   Roles - Accounts Payable Roles        sprolemt                                         The Maintain Own Purchase Cards and                  Optional
                                                                                                                                            Statements check box is available on the Role
                                                                                                                                            Permissions tab on the Accounts Payable Roles
                                                                                                                                            screen. When you select this check box, users
                                                                                                                                            assigned to the role are able to maintain
                                                                                                                                            information for their only their own purchase cards
                                                                                                                                            and statements.
                                                                                                                                            The Maintain Others' Purchase Cards and
                                                                                                                                            Statements data access category is available on
                                                                                                                                            the Data Access tab on the Accounts Payable
                                                                                                                                            Roles screen. This option allows you to limit the
                                                                                                                                            access that users assigned to the role have to
                                                                                                                                            maintain others' purchase card and statement
                                                                                                                                            information by department. The options are None,
                                                                                                                                            Limited, and Full. The default value for this option
                                                                                                                                            is None.
                                                                                                                                            The Convert Purchase Card Statements to
                                                                                                                                            Invoices data access category is available on the
                                                                                                                                            Data Access tab on the Accounts Payable Roles
                                                                                                                                            screen. This option allows you to limit the access
                                                                                                                                            that users assigned to the role have to convert
                                                                                                                                            purchase card statements to invoices by
                                                                                                                                            department. The options are None, Limited, and
                                                                                                                                            Full. The default value for this option is None.

    MUN-62292        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines   Roles - Accounts Payable Roles,       sprolemt                                         Accounts Payable Roles                              Optional
                                                     Purchase Orders Roles, Requisitions                                                    The Override Contract Expiration/Extension Date
                                                     Roles                                                                                  Restrictions on Invoices check box is available on
                                                                                                                                            the Role Permissions tab. When you select this
                                                                                                                                            check box, users assigned to the role are able to
                                                                                                                                            enter new invoices against contracts that have
                                                                                                                                            expired or are past the extension date. The default
                                                                                                                                            value is not selected.
                                                                                                                                            Purchase Orders Roles
                                                                                                                                            The Override Contract Expiration/Extension Date
                                                                                                                                            Restrictions on POs check box is available. When
                                                                                                                                            you select this check box, users assigned to the
                                                                                                                                            role are able to enter purchase orders against
                                                                                                                                            contracts that have expired or ore past the
                                                                                                                                            extension date. The default value is not selected.
                                                                                                                                            Requisitions Roles
                                                                                                                                            The Override Contract Expiration/Extension Date
                                                                                                                                            Restrictions on REQs check box is available.
                                                                                                                                            When you select this check box, users assigned to
                                                                                                                                            the role are able to enter new requisitions against
                                                                                                                                            contracts that have expired or are past the
                                                                                                                                            extension date. The default value is not selected.




    MUN-70714        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines   Roles - Purchase Orders Roles         sprolemt                                         The Override PO Delivery Method Defaults check Optional
                                                                                                                                            box is available on the Purchase Order Roles
                                                                                                                                            screen. When you select this check box, users
                                                                                                                                            assigned to the role can modify the delivery
                                                                                                                                            method specified on a purchase order. The default
                                                                                                                                            value for this check box is not selected.

    MUN-70773        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines   Roles - Requisitions Roles            sprolemt                                         The Override PO Delivery Method Defaults check Optional
                                                                                                                                            box is available on the Requisitions Roles screen.
                                                                                                                                            When you select this check box, users assigned to
                                                                                                                                            the role are able to modify the delivery method
                                                                                                                                            specified on a requisition noted for conversion to a
                                                                                                                                            purchase order. The default value for this check
                                                                                                                                            box is not selected.



6                                                                                    d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                       (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
    Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                            Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                              Change Needed

    MUN-60964        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Account Receivable Miscellaneous      armismnt                                         When a new miscellaneous code is added, the
                             Receivable                       Codes                                                                                  program sets the value of the arms_active field in
                                                                                                                                                     the armisccd table to Y, which indicates that the
                                                                                                                                                     code is active.
    MUN-60984        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Account Receivable Settings           arparmnt                                         The program includes changes to the Calculate
                             Receivable                                                                                                              Interest on Penalty Charges To check box in the
                                                                                                                                                     audit history.
    MUN-69660        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Accounts Receivable - Payments        gbinvent, arrctpst                               When charges associated with a project account
                             Receivable                       Journal, General Billing - Invoice                                                     are billed or received in the programs, the
                                                              Entry and Proof                                                                        programs update the billed or received amounts in
                                                                                                                                                     the Financials - Project Accounting module.

    MUN-64136        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Accounts Receivable Charge Codes      archgmnt                                         The Use for Project Accounting check box is
                             Receivable                                                                                                              available under Additional Attributes on the
                                                                                                                                                     General tab for AR category 2 - Misc Cash
                                                                                                                                                     Receipts. If this check is selected, it indicates that
                                                                                                                                                     the charge code is used for project accounting. If
                                                                                                                                                     you select the check box, the Project Type and
                                                                                                                                                     Project Account String columns are available on
                                                                                                                                                     the Accounts tab.
    MUN-72525        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Accounts Receivable Charge Codes,     arwsbinq, archgcrd                               Programs were modified to reference the rate from
                             Receivable                       Charges Credits (link routine)                                                         the AR charge code instead of the rate stored on
                                                                                                                                                     the txmdppcc table.
    MUN-59356        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Accounts Receivable Departments,      ardeptmt                                         If you do not have permissions to maintain
                             Receivable                       Accounts Receivable Settings                                                           Accounts Receivable settings, you can only view
                                                                                                                                                     existing department-specific codes on the
                                                                                                                                                     Accounts Receivable Settings screen; you cannot
                                                                                                                                                     maintain department codes.
    MUN-74703        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Accounts Receivable Settings                                                           The Over/Short tab is renamed the Accounting
                             Receivable                                                                                                              Options tab.
                                                                                                                                                     Cash accounting method-specific: The Post to the
                                                                                                                                                     Deferred Revenue and Revenue Accounts in
                                                                                                                                                     Addition to Posting to the Discount and Accounts
                                                                                                                                                     Receivable Accounts check box is available under
                                                                                                                                                     Cash Accounting Discount Options on the
                                                                                                                                                     Accounting Options tab. If you select this check
                                                                                                                                                     box, the deferred revenue and revenue accounts,
                                                                                                                                                     in addition to the discount and accounts receivable
                                                                                                                                                     accounts, receive a post when a bill has a discount
                                                                                                                                                     amount.

    MUN-65582        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Accounts Receivable Summary           arrctpst                                         The programs display write-offs as positive
                             Receivable                       Report, Posted Payments Report                                                         amounts in reports.
    MUN-74614        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Aging Report                          aragerpt                                         The data in the Microsoft® Excel export is now the
                             Receivable                                                                                                              same as the data in other output types.
    MUN-63730        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Aging Report                          aragerpt                                         The following changes were made to the program:
                             Receivable                                                                                                              • The program correctly excludes activity that
                                                                                                                                                     occurs after the aging date.
                                                                                                                                                     • The Include Property Code check box is available
                                                                                                                                                     under Other Options on the Aging Report screen. If
                                                                                                                                                     this check box is selected, the program includes
                                                                                                                                                     the property code in the report. If this check box is
                                                                                                                                                     cleared, the program excludes the property code
                                                                                                                                                     from the report.
                                                                                                                                                     • The Prin Paid and Bill Adj columns are available
                                                                                                                                                     in the report. The Prin Paid column includes the
                                                                                                                                                     principle paid amounts on bills and the Bill Adj
                                                                                                                                                     column includes adjustment amounts from any
                                                                                                                                                     activity type (ADJ, ABT, FEE, PEN) that adjusts bill
                                                                                                                                                     amounts after the bill is created.
                                                                                                                                                     • The list of options available on the AR Category
                                                                                                                                                     list on the Aging Report screen is dependent on
                                                                                                                                                     your user permissions.




7                                                                                             d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                           (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
    Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                         Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                            Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                Change Needed

    MUN-73501        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Aging Report                            aragerpt                                         The program includes the correct customer ID with
                             Receivable                                                                                                                the customer name in the summary version of the
                                                                                                                                                       report.
    MUN-65253        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Application Entry, Customers            arcstmnt                                         The Other and Personal tabs on the Customers
                             Receivable                                                                                                                screen are accessible when you open the
                                                                                                                                                       Customers program by clicking the Cust Maint
                                                                                                                                                       button on the Application Names screen in the
                                                                                                                                                       Permits and Code Enforcement Application Entry
                                                                                                                                                       program.
                                                                                                                                                       The Credit Store button is restored to the
                                                                                                                                                       Customers program. Click the button to open the
                                                                                                                                                       Customer Credit Score program to view or
                                                                                                                                                       maintain credit score details.
    MUN-69237        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   AR Discounts (link routine)             argendis                                         When the Discount on Final Bill Payment discount
                             Receivable                                                                                                                rule is being used, the routine correctly applies
                                                                                                                                                       discounts on bills that have details lines billed with
                                                                                                                                                       a credit balance.
    MUN-60367        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   AR Liability (link routine)             arliabty                                         When you apply payments to multiple details lines
                             Receivable                                                                                                                and the total payment does not overpay the bill, the
                                                                                                                                                       routine correctly does not update the liability
                                                                                                                                                       account.
    MUN-60050        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   AR Liability (link routine), Payments   arliabty, arrctpst                               The routine does not prevent the posting of
                             Receivable                       Journal                                                                                  batches that contain charges with the activity types
                                                                                                                                                       of PEN or FEE.
    MUN-68037        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   AR Payments Web Service                 arwspmts                                         Overpayments taken through Tyler Cashiering
                             Receivable                                                                                                                display correctly on the Settlement Information
                                                                                                                                                       screen in the Munis Payment Entry program and in
                                                                                                                                                       Payment Entry reports.
    MUN-63033        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   AR Web Payment Services                 arwspmts                                         Partial payments taken through the Tyler
                             Receivable                                                                                                                Cashiering payment Web service against multiple-
                                                                                                                                                       line bills for which the prorate partial payments
                                                                                                                                                       setting is active no longer result in out-of-balance
                                                                                                                                                       receipts.
    MUN-58946        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Assess Late Fees                        aradlfee                                         The Effective Date box is available on the Assign
                             Receivable                                                                                                                Percentage Fees screen. This box indicates the
                                                                                                                                                       date to add percentage-based fees to bills.

    MUN-57655        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Assess Late Fees, Detail Receivables arspclnk, aradlfee, arctspns,                       The Use Special Condition Restrictions To list is
                             Receivable                       by Date, Over-Short Adjustment       arthrudt, arwrtoff                                  available on the Special Conditions tab of the
                                                              Process, Suspense Processing                                                             Detail Receivables by Date screen. This list
                                                                                                                                                       indicates the special condition restrictions to use
                                                                                                                                                       for selecting the bills to include in the report.
                                                                                                                                                       You can leave the default blank value to not restrict
                                                                                                                                                       bill selection by special condition code or choose
                                                                                                                                                       to exclude or include bills by a specified set of
                                                                                                                                                       special condition codes.
                                                                                                                                                       If you select Exclude if in Selected Set or Include if
                                                                                                                                                       in Selected Set, you must click the Selected button
                                                                                                                                                       to display the Special Condition Chooser screen to
                                                                                                                                                       create the set of special condition codes for which
                                                                                                                                                       to exclude or include bills. The number beside the
                                                                                                                                                       button text indicates the number of special
                                                                                                                                                       condition codes that currently exist in the set.
                                                                                                                                                       The Special Condition Codes lists are available on
                                                                                                                                                       the Assign Fixed Fees and Assign Percentage
                                                                                                                                                       Fees in the Assign Fees program and the Over-
                                                                                                                                                       Short Adjustment Process screen, and the Special
                                                                                                                                                       Condition list is available on the Suspense
                                                                                                                                                       Processing screen.
                                                                                                                                                       These lists allow you to choose whether or not to
                                                                                                                                                       select bills by special condition codes. You can
                                                                                                                                                       leave the default blank value to not restrict bill
                                                                                                                                                       selection by special condition code or choose to
    MUN-71340        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Bill Inquiry                            arbilinq                                         The program displays the correct amount due on
                             Receivable                                                                                                                bills that contain one or more lines with a zero
                                                                                                                                                       balance.

8                                                                                             d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                             (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
    Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)         Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                            Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                             Change Needed

    MUN-77915        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Bill Inquiry, Charge Codes            archgmnt, arorigbl                              The Subject to Small Business Calc check box is
                             Receivable                                                                                                             available on the General tab of the Charge Codes
                                                                                                                                                    screen. This check box is specific to real estate
                                                                                                                                                    charge codes and if selected, it identifies
                                                                                                                                                    properties with the charge code as small business
                                                                                                                                                    properties.
                                                                                                                                                    The External Value box is available on the Bill
                                                                                                                                                    Inquiry - Original Bill screen and indicates the tax
                                                                                                                                                    amount that is billed and collected through external
                                                                                                                                                    taxing bodies.
    MUN-60806        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Bill Inquiry, Mass Payment            argendis                                        The discount calculation process accommodates
                             Receivable                       Processing, Payment Entry, Process                                                    values up to 99999999.99 and successfully
                                                              Lockbox File                                                                          displays discount amounts up to this value on
                                                                                                                                                    screens.
    MUN-68680        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Bill Inquiry, Payment Entry           arpribil                                        If you click Find to search for bill records and prior
                             Receivable                                                                                                             year unpaid bills exist, the programs include these
                                                                                                                                                    bills in the set of records found.
    MUN-65488        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Bill Inquiry, Payment Entry           arxtrfnc                    Maryland            The amount in the Next Month Due box on the Bill
                             Receivable                                                                                                             Inquiry and Bill Information screens include the
                                                                                                                                                    correct amount of interest.
    MUN-59548        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Bill Inquiry, Payment Entry           argenint                                        When interest calculates back to the due date, the
                             Receivable                                                                                                             interest routine correctly calculates the next
                                                                                                                                                    interest amount that displays in the Next Int box for
                                                                                                                                                    the number of periods that have passed.

    MUN-65999        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Bill Inquiry, Payment Entry           arxtrfnc                    Louisiana           You can reprint Real Estate and Personal Property
                             Receivable                                                                                                             bills. You can either click the Reprint button, or you
                                                                                                                                                    can select the Bill Reprint option on the Output
                                                                                                                                                    Options screen.
    MUN-67168        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Bill Inquiry/Payment Entry, Penalty   arcalpen                                        Improvements made to the performance of the
                             Receivable                       Calculation (link routine)                                                            penalty calculation routine decrease the time is
                                                                                                                                                    takes to display bills on the Browse Bill History
                                                                                                                                                    screen if the set of bills includes bills with penalty
                                                                                                                                                    charges.
    MUN-60256        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Bill Refund Processing                arrefund                                        If you update a refund bill that currently has a
                             Receivable                                                                                                             Workflow approval status of Approved, the
                                                                                                                                                    Workflow process resets the status of the bill to
                                                                                                                                                    Pending and the bill again requires approval
                                                                                                                                                    through the Workflow process.
    MUN-76671        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Bill Refund Processing                arrefund                                        The program allows you to select bills for refund
                             Receivable                                                                                                             processing by abatement or adjustment reason
                                                                                                                                                    code on the Mass Select screen.
    MUN-65387        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Bill Refund Processing                arrefund                    Maryland            The program places the amounts in the correct
                             Receivable                                                                                                             positions in the refund report.
    MUN-67429        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Bill Refund Processing                arrefund                                        When you create a refund on a bill that includes a
                             Receivable                                                                                                             discount amount, the program correctly does not
                                                                                                                                                    include the discount amount in the total principle
                                                                                                                                                    refund amount. The discount amount is correctly
                                                                                                                                                    shown as a credit on the bill in the Bill Inquiry
                                                                                                                                                    program.
    MUN-56161        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Calc On-Line Amounts for Report       arcalotf                                        When you recalculate bill calculations, the program
                             Receivable                       Writer                                                                                updates all records found as a result of the search
                                                                                                                                                    criteria used during the define process. Because of
                                                                                                                                                    this change in the way the recalculation process
                                                                                                                                                    works, the Recalc column has been removed from
                                                                                                                                                    the calculation table on the Calc and Store On-Line
                                                                                                                                                    Bill Calculations browse screen.

    MUN-57522        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Calculate Amounts for Report Writer   arcalotf                                        The program allows you to calculate amounts for
                             Receivable                                                                                                             all accounts receivable (AR) categories except for
                                                                                                                                                    02 - Misc Cash Receipts.
    MUN-77509        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes                          archgmnt                                        Business License-, Parking Ticket-, and Property
                             Receivable                                                                                                             Tax-specific:
                                                                                                                                                    When you clear or select the Subject to Penalty
                                                                                                                                                    check box during an update, the program retains
                                                                                                                                                    the new check box status when you save your
                                                                                                                                                    changes.
9                                                                                            d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                           (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program         Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                             Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                  Change Needed

     MUN-62707        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes            archgmnt                                         Tax-specific: The Apply to Exempt Properties
                              Receivable                                                                                                check box on the Charge Code Options screen is
                                                                                                                                        available to all states. If this check box is selected,
                                                                                                                                        it indicates that the charge should be applied to
                                                                                                                                        exempt properties in the Tax Calculation program.

     MUN-72131        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes            archgmnt                                         The BL Rate Table button is available on the
                              Receivable                                                                                                Charge Codes screen for AR category 55 -
                                                                                                                                        Business Licenses charge codes. Click the button
                                                                                                                                        to maintain business license charge code rates for
                                                                                                                                        the current record on the Business License Charge
                                                                                                                                        Code Rates screen. The BL Rate Table button is
                                                                                                                                        only available if the activity type is PRIN and the
                                                                                                                                        calculation code is 07, 09, or 10, or the activity
                                                                                                                                        type is LL (late list penalty) or FEE and the
                                                                                                                                        calculation code is 11 or 12.


     MUN-63384        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes            archgmnt                                         The Minimum Amount and Maximum Amount
                              Receivable                                                                                                boxes can accommodate values up to nine digits
                                                                                                                                        long and amounts up to 999999999.99.
     MUN-67553        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes            archgmnt                                         The program allows late list (LL) charges to be
                              Receivable                                                                                                associated with other principle (PRIN) charges.
     MUN-62874        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes            archgmnt                                         The program allows you to successfully copy fee
                              Receivable                                                                                                charges with the same charge code, but different
                                                                                                                                        accounts receivable (AR) categories, from one
                                                                                                                                        year to another.
     MUN-61422        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes            archgobj, archgmnt                               The program allows you to successfully delete
                              Receivable                                                                                                charge codes.
     MUN-61109        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes            archgmnt                                         The program allows you to type a value in the
                              Receivable                                                                                                Amount box under Rate Information when you add
                                                                                                                                        or update a Utility Billing category charge code
                                                                                                                                        with a calculation code of 68.
     MUN-61104        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes            archgmnt                     Connecticut         The program retains the value in the Minimum
                              Receivable                                                                                                Interest Amount box when you update and save
                                                                                                                                        changes for an AR category 20 (real estate)
                                                                                                                                        charge code.
     MUN-69974        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes            archgmnt                                         The Rate Table box is available under Rate
                              Receivable                                                                                                Information on the General Tab of the Charge
                                                                                                                                        Codes screen. This box indicates the rate table for
                                                                                                                                        the charge code to reference when calculating
                                                                                                                                        rates. When the calculation code is 07, rates are
                                                                                                                                        established in a rate table and you must type a
                                                                                                                                        rate table code in the box.
     MUN-67173        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes            archgmnt                                         The UB Clearing general ledger account type is
                              Receivable                                                                                                available on the Accounts tab for Utility Billing (UB)
                                                                                                                                        category charge codes. Existing liability accounts
                                                                                                                                        on charge codes are reassigned to the UB
                                                                                                                                        Clearing account type, which is used differently
                                                                                                                                        than the standard Liability account type. The UB
                                                                                                                                        Clearing account type displays for a UB charge
                                                                                                                                        code regardless of whether or not the Use Liability
                                                                                                                                        check box is selected for the category on the
                                                                                                                                        Category Specific Options screen in the Accounts
                                                                                                                                        Receivable Settings program. If the Use Liability
                                                                                                                                        check box is selected, the program still allows you
                                                                                                                                        to add a liability account, but anything added to the
                                                                                                                                        liability account does not affect the UB clearing
                                                                                                                                        account.




10                                                                               d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                            (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                        Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)          Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Change Needed

     MUN-62287        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes                           archgmnt                     Virginia                   The Use Relief Accounts check box is available on
                              Receivable                                                                                                                      the General tab for accounts receivable category
                                                                                                                                                              25 - Personal Property, 30- Motor Vehicle, and 35 -
                                                                                                                                                              Motor Vehicle Decals. If this check box is selected,
                                                                                                                                                              it indicates that relief accounts are available and
                                                                                                                                                              required for the charge code. If you are creating a
                                                                                                                                                              new charge code record and select this check box,
                                                                                                                                                              you must add the account information for the AR
                                                                                                                                                              Motor Vehicle Relief and Reserve Motor Vehicle
                                                                                                                                                              Relief accounts on the Accounts tab.

     MUN-68806        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes                           archgobj                                                Updates were made to the archgobj process to
                              Receivable                                                                                                                      eliminate issues that occurred in the Charge Codes
                                                                                                                                                              program with miscellaneous charge codes that
                                                                                                                                                              were set up to use a general billing accounts
                                                                                                                                                              receivable (AR) code. As a result of these updates,
                                                                                                                                                              the Charge Codes program:
                                                                                                                                                              • Does not mark undeleted charge code records as
                                                                                                                                                              deleted (Del).
                                                                                                                                                              • Does not omit existing charge code records from
                                                                                                                                                              the browse screen.
                                                                                                                                                              • Displays the correct charge code record when
                                                                                                                                                              you select it on the browse screen.
                                                                                                                                                              • Successfully finds any existing charge code.
     MUN-71303        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes                           archgmnt                                                When you copy charges from one year to another,
                              Receivable                                                                                                                      the program includes all charge codes and their
                                                                                                                                                              related charges, such as General Billing sale tax
                                                                                                                                                              charges, into the new year.
     MUN-73625        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes (Tax)                     archgmnt                     Virginia                   The Calc 100% Penalty range boxes, Fixed
                              Receivable                                                                                                                      Penalty range boxes, and the Penalty Amount box
                                                                                                                                                              on the General tab are available for entry for both
                                                                                                                                                              fee and late list charges.
     MUN-73643        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes (Utility Billing)         archgmnt                                                If your site processes liens as tax transfers, the
                              Receivable                                                                                                                      program displays the correct charge descriptions
                                                                                                                                                              for the Utility Billing charge codes in the Tax Lien
                                                                                                                                                              Principal Charge and Tax Lien Interest Charge
                                                                                                                                                              boxes on the General tab.
     MUN-69485        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes (Utility Billing)         archgobj                                                The program no longer causes other programs to
                              Receivable                                                                                                                      ignore additional revenue accounts when a Utility
                                                                                                                                                              Billing charge code has been defined with more
                                                                                                                                                              than one revenue account.
     MUN-61100        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Charge Codes, Charge Object            archgmnt, archgobj                                      Verification of user permissions and access to
                              Receivable                                                                                                                      charge codes in the Charge Codes program no
                                                                                                                                                              longer results in an endless loop of error
                                                                                                                                                              messages. The program does not allow you to
                                                                                                                                                              update a charge code or create a find set of charge
                                                                                                                                                              code records if your user permissions do not allow
                                                                                                                                                              access to that charge.
     MUN-67127        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   County Property Payments               arnycpmt                     Suffolk County, New York   The program successfully creates installment
                              Receivable                                                                                                                      records when the PENC charge is paid on tax lien
                                                                                                                                                              (AR category 23) bills.
     MUN-73450        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customer EFT Data                      areftmnt                                                If you delete an electronic fund transfer (EFT)
                              Receivable                                                                                                                      record associated with a customer, the program
                                                                                                                                                              includes the EFT record deletion in the list of audit
                                                                                                                                                              records on the Customer Audits screen when you
                                                                                                                                                              click View Audit to view audit records for the
                                                                                                                                                              customer.
                                                                                                                                                              You can only delete a customer EFT record if you
                                                                                                                                                              have permissions to maintain customer records.

     MUN-74580        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customer Find                          arcidlib                                                The function arcidlib_getAcct now sets the default
                              Receivable                                                                                                                      customer status to "A."




11                                                                                              d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                                 (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                   Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                         Change Needed

     MUN-71609        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customer Find Names               arcidlib                                         Each time you conduct a search for a customer on
                              Receivable                                                                                                          the Find Names screen, the program retains the
                                                                                                                                                  check box options you selected at the bottom of
                                                                                                                                                  the screen and displays them as the default
                                                                                                                                                  options the next time you search for customers by
                                                                                                                                                  name.
     MUN-68085        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customer Find Names               arcidlib                                         If an additional address is selected for the
                              Receivable                                                                                                          agent/operator in the Munis Business License -
                                                                                                                                                  Business Accounts program, the program correctly
                                                                                                                                                  includes the e-mail address and fax number
                                                                                                                                                  associated with the additional address on the
                                                                                                                                                  application renewal forms export file.
     MUN-64237        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customer Match and Merge          arcidmer                                         When you click Customer Match & Merge on the
                              Receivable                                                                                                          Accounts Receivable Setup menu, the correct
                                                                                                                                                  program (armasmrg) opens.
     MUN-71434        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customer Match and Merge,         armasmrg, arcidmer                               When you merge a customer that is a property
                              Receivable                       Customer Merge                                                                     owner on a Central Property - Property Master
                                                                                                                                                  record with another customer, the program
                                                                                                                                                  includes the activity in the list of audited changes
                                                                                                                                                  on the Property Master record.
     MUN-60009        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customers                         arcstmnt, arcidlib                               If customer formatting is not enabled in the
                              Receivable                                                                                                          Accounts Receivable Settings program and you
                                                                                                                                                  create customer records from the Employee
                                                                                                                                                  Master program in Munis® Payroll, the Customers
                                                                                                                                                  program formats names as FIRST_NAME MI
                                                                                                                                                  LAST_NAME SUFFIX.
                                                                                                                                                  If customer formatting is enabled in the Accounts
                                                                                                                                                  Receivable Settings program, the Customers
                                                                                                                                                  program formats the names according to the name
                                                                                                                                                  formatting settings established in the Accounts
                                                                                                                                                  Receivable Settings program.

     MUN-73928        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customers                         arcstmnt                                         If you change the ZIP Code™ for an address on
                              Receivable                                                                                                          the Additional Addresses screen, the program
                                                                                                                                                  displays a message for which you can choose
                                                                                                                                                  whether or not to have the program update the City
                                                                                                                                                  and State values to the city and state associated
                                                                                                                                                  with the new ZIP Code.
     MUN-72899        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customers                         arcstmnt                                         If you update the secondary customer or contact
                              Receivable                                                                                                          name in the second Name box at the top of the
                                                                                                                                                  Customers screen and data exists for the
                                                                                                                                                  secondary customer on the Personal tab and
                                                                                                                                                  Associated Names tab (property tax only), the
                                                                                                                                                  program displays a message for which you can
                                                                                                                                                  choose whether or not to delete the Personal or
                                                                                                                                                  Associated name information for the previous
                                                                                                                                                  secondary name. Click Yes if you changed the
                                                                                                                                                  secondary contact to a different person or click No
                                                                                                                                                  if you just made a correction to the secondary
                                                                                                                                                  contact name.
                                                                                                                                                  If you click Yes, the program clears the customer
                                                                                                                                                  information under Secondary on the Personal tab,
                                                                                                                                                  removes the previous name from the Associated
                                                                                                                                                  Names tab, and then adds the new name to the list
                                                                                                                                                  of associated names.
                                                                                                                                                  If you click No, the program updates the name on
                                                                                                                                                  the Associated Names tab, but leaves all other
                                                                                                                                                  information associated with the secondary name.

     MUN-66224        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customers                         arcstmnt                     Delaware            The program allows access to and display of
                              Receivable                                                                                                          customer information from Delaware Local Wage
                                                                                                                                                  Tax programs.




12                                                                                         d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                         (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                    Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                             Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                             Change Needed

     MUN-74292        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customers                          arcstmnt                                         The program reserves sequence 0 for primary
                              Receivable                                                                                                           name and sequence 1 for the secondary name on
                                                                                                                                                   the customer record even if there is no secondary
                                                                                                                                                   name on the record. When you add associated
                                                                                                                                                   names on the Associated Names tab (property tax-
                                                                                                                                                   specific), the program assigns sequence 2 to the
                                                                                                                                                   first associated name, sequence 3 to the second
                                                                                                                                                   associated name, and so on.

     MUN-73929        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customers                          arcstmnt                                         The Special Cond button is available on the
                              Receivable                                                                                                           Customers screen when the program is opened
                                                                                                                                                   from Permits and Code Enforcement menus. When
                                                                                                                                                   you click the button, the program opens the
                                                                                                                                                   Special Conditions/Notes program, where you can
                                                                                                                                                   update or delete existing conditions or add new
                                                                                                                                                   conditions to associate with the customer.

     MUN-66260        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customers                          arcstmnt                                         When you cancel the process of adding a
                              Receivable                                                                                                           customer record and confirm the cancellation, the
                                                                                                                                                   program then allows you to successfully close the
                                                                                                                                                   Customers screen.
     MUN-60794        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customers                          argetnxt                                         When you create a new customer record, the
                              Receivable                                                                                                           program can successfully accommodate and
                                                                                                                                                   assign a new customer ID up to nine digits long.

     MUN-63426        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customers                          arcstmnt                                         When you delete a customer record, the program
                              Receivable                                                                                                           also deletes any associated tradesman licenses.

     MUN-68133        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Customers                          arcstmnt                                         You can type e-mail addresses up to 50 characters
                              Receivable                                                                                                           long in the Email Address box on the Contact
                                                                                                                                                   Information tab.
     MUN-62429        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Delinquent Letter Export           ardelltr                                         The program correctly includes partially paid
                              Receivable                                                                                                           unpaid penalty amounts in the Penalty column of
                                                                                                                                                   the export file, not the Other Charges column.

     MUN-60432        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Detail Receivables by Date         arthrudt                                         Changes made to the program decrease the time it
                              Receivable                                                                                                           takes to process the report.
     MUN-59836        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Detail Receivables by Date         arthrudt                                         During processing, the program uses the status
                              Receivable                                                                                                           flag on the abatement record to determine whether
                                                                                                                                                   or not a tax abatement has been posted.

     MUN-59438        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Detail Receivables by Date         arthrudt                                         Microsoft® SQL Server-specific: If you specify a
                              Receivable                                                                                                           date or a general ledger year and period for which
                                                                                                                                                   to include bill activity in the receivables report, the
                                                                                                                                                   program only includes detail receivables for the
                                                                                                                                                   specified date or general ledger year or period in
                                                                                                                                                   the report.
     MUN-67218        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Detail Receivables by Date         arthrudt                                         The program correctly excludes all receipt activity
                              Receivable                                                                                                           from the receivables report that occurs after the
                                                                                                                                                   receivables through date, including receipt activity
                                                                                                                                                   created through the Transfer of Overpayments
                                                                                                                                                   program.
     MUN-74141        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Detail Receivables by Date         arthrudt                                         The program does not include general billing
                              Receivable                                                                                                           adjustments in the report that occur after the
                                                                                                                                                   through date, year, or period.
     MUN-74016        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Detail Receivables by Date         arthrudt                                         The program retains the values in the general
                              Receivable                                                                                                           ledger-specific fields on the Receivables Report
                                                                                                                                                   Options tab when you press Tab to move to
                                                                                                                                                   subsequent fields.




13                                                                                          d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                            (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                      Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                            Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                              Change Needed

     MUN-69219        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Detail Receivables by Date, Detail   arrgster, arthrudt                               The Print Bills in Tax Lien check box is available in
                              Receivable                       Receivables Register                                                                  each program. If you select this check box, it
                                                                                                                                                     directs the program to include a section at the end
                                                                                                                                                     of the report that shows real estate (AR category
                                                                                                                                                     20) bills that have a tax lien status.
                                                                                                                                                     You cannot locate these bills in the Bill Inquiry or
                                                                                                                                                     Payment Entry programs using a general search
                                                                                                                                                     for bills; you must search for a specific AR
                                                                                                                                                     category 23 bill and click Orig Bill to view the
                                                                                                                                                     original AR category 20 bill that was transferred to
                                                                                                                                                     lien.
                                                                                                                                                     If you clear this check box, the program does not
                                                                                                                                                     include the section in the report.

     MUN-66491        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Discount Calculation Link Routine    argendis                                         When you apply full payment to bills for which
                              Receivable                                                                                                             there is a discount amount, the routine correctly
                                                                                                                                                     applies discount amounts to the total amount paid
                                                                                                                                                     without leaving penny amounts remaining to be
                                                                                                                                                     paid on the bill.
     MUN-67293        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Employer Codes                       arempmnt                                         The program can display the entire ZIP+4 code in
                              Receivable                                                                                                             the Zip Code box on the screen.
     MUN-61679        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Exemption Codes                      arexdmnt                                         When you click the help button in the Type Code
                              Receivable                                                                                                             box on the Exemption Codes screen to select a
                                                                                                                                                     type code, the program correctly displays the
                                                                                                                                                     codes in the Code column of the Type Code Help
                                                                                                                                                     screen.
     MUN-66757        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Find Names                           arcidlib                                         The Search in My Department Only and Search in
                              Receivable                                                                                                             Specific Module Only check boxes are available on
                                                                                                                                                     the Find Names screen used to search for
                                                                                                                                                     customers. If you select the Search in My
                                                                                                                                                     Department Only check box, the program only
                                                                                                                                                     searches for customers created in your
                                                                                                                                                     department; if you select Search in Specific
                                                                                                                                                     Module Only, the program only searches for
                                                                                                                                                     customers created in a specific Munis module.
                                                                                                                                                     When you select the Search in Specific Module
                                                                                                                                                     Only check box, you must then select the module
                                                                                                                                                     from the list beside the check box.

     MUN-68484        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Garnishment Processing               argarnpr                                         If you process a garnishment using the employer
                              Receivable                                                                                                             code and information for the secondary name on a
                                                                                                                                                     customer record, the program correctly includes
                                                                                                                                                     the name and Social Security number of the
                                                                                                                                                     secondary customer as the main customer under
                                                                                                                                                     Customer ID in the garnishment notice and the
                                                                                                                                                     name and Social Security number of the primary
                                                                                                                                                     customer on the customer record under Other
                                                                                                                                                     Name in the notice.

     MUN-82369        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Human Services Payments Import       arhsimpt                                         You can successfully open the program without
                              Receivable                                                                                                             encountering the "More than one Revenue Acct on
                                                                                                                                                     charge code" error. The program only displays this
                                                                                                                                                     error if the charge code actually does have more
                                                                                                                                                     than one revenue account on it.

     MUN-63222        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Incidents                            gbincmnt                                         If you type a city and state for the incident location
                              Receivable                                                                                                             on the Incidents screen that are different than the
                                                                                                                                                     values associated with the ZIP Code™, the
                                                                                                                                                     program displays a message for which you can
                                                                                                                                                     choose whether or not to change the city and state.
                                                                                                                                                     If you click Yes on the message, the program
                                                                                                                                                     accepts the updated information.




14                                                                                            d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                           (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                        Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                            Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Change Needed

     MUN-60291        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Mail Payment Processing                armalpmt, arlckbox                                  The Mail Payment Processing program is available
                              Receivable                                                                                                                  on the Payment Processing menu. If your site
                                                                                                                                                          processes payments received through the mail,
                                                                                                                                                          use the Mail Payment Processing program to
                                                                                                                                                          manually create a lockbox file for these payments
                                                                                                                                                          that can be processed in the Process Lockbox
                                                                                                                                                          Files program.

     MUN-74113        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Mass Payment Import, Payment           arlckbox, arcshrct, arwebimp,   Connecticut         An issue that caused a blank interest account to be
                              Receivable                       Entry, Process Lockbox Files, Web      arrmaspmt                                           used on payment receipts for Connecticut
                                                               Payment Import                                                                             suspense bills is resolved.
     MUN-63272        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Mass Payment Processing                armaspmt                                            The program includes ineligible bills and bills with
                              Receivable                                                                                                                  errors in the difference report.
     MUN-63132        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   MAV2 Processing Link Routine           armav2lk                                            The routine no longer generates errors during
                              Receivable                                                                                                                  processing of MAV2 forms in Tyler Cashiering.
     MUN-72235        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Miscellaneous Cash Payments Import armsimpt                                                The program is now Munis® Scheduler enabled.
                              Receivable
     MUN-62446        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Motor Vehicle Decal Mailer Export,   artrnsfr, ardclexp, arlckbox,     Virginia            Munis® Tax programs now allow more than 999
                              Receivable                       Payment Entry, Process Lockbox File, arcshrct                                              charge detail lines to be associated with a Virginia
                                                               Transfer of Overpayments                                                                   personal property bill for motor vehicles and
                                                                                                                                                          decals. As a result of this change, the programs
                                                                                                                                                          accommodate the increase in the size of the
                                                                                                                                                          charge sequence field for motor vehicle decals.

     MUN-66122        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Multiple Accounts Receivable           arwspmts, artrnsfr, arnyinrg,                       References made to FEE type charge codes as
                              Receivable                       Programs                               arncafee, arprepay, arrefrev,                       being category zero through the Accounts
                                                                                                      arnyppmt, arnsfnot, arlckbox,                       Receivable charge object process (archgobj) have
                                                                                                      arncdsrp, arcshrct, arwebimp,                       been removed. Under the archgobj changes, fees
                                                                                                      arlnadlf, arpmtlnk, arspcint,                       now belong to the category defined under their
                                                                                                      argarnpr, arnyinst, aradlfee,                       accounts receivable (AR) code.
                                                                                                      armaspmt

     MUN-72227        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Non-Sufficient Funds Notices           arnsfnot                                            The Non-Sufficient Funds Notices program is
                              Receivable                                                                                                                  available. Use the Non-sufficient Fund Notices
                                                                                                                                                          program to create non-sufficient fund (NSF)
                                                                                                                                                          notices on the same form used for invoices and
                                                                                                                                                          statements. This notice alerts a customer that he
                                                                                                                                                          or she has NSF
                                                                                                                                                          activity on bills. The notice includes the year, bill
                                                                                                                                                          number, receipt number, bill amount, and NSF
                                                                                                                                                          charge amount.
     MUN-75424        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Original Bill Routine                  arorigbl                        North Carolina      The routine displays the correct tax rate for
                              Receivable                                                                                                                  rollback bills on the Original Bill screen. The tax
                                                                                                                                                          rate is based on the rollback bill's levy year.

     MUN-74795        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Original Bill Routine                  archgcrd                        North Carolina      The routine uses a rollback bill's levy year to
                              Receivable                                                                                                                  determine the tax rate that displays for charges or
                                                                                                                                                          credits associated with the bill.
     MUN-75701        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Detail                         arpaydet                                            When the first installment charge has been fully
                              Receivable                                                                                                                  paid and an overpayment is applied to the second
                                                                                                                                                          installment charge of a two-installment bill, the
                                                                                                                                                          program correctly updates the installment records
                                                                                                                                                          and the bill remains in balance.

     MUN-60514        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Detail (link routine),         arpaydet                                            The routine correctly allows application of payment
                              Receivable                       Payment Entry                                                                              and allocation of discounts on receipt installment
                                                                                                                                                          records for multiple-line, multiple-installment bills
                                                                                                                                                          paid during the discount period.

     MUN-68710        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry                          arcshrct                                            If a bill does not have a principle (PRIN) activity
                              Receivable                                                                                                                  charge code, the program applies the overpayment
                                                                                                                                                          amount to the first detail line on the bill. If a bill
                                                                                                                                                          does have a PRIN activity charge code, the
                                                                                                                                                          program applies the overpayment amount to the
                                                                                                                                                          PRIN activity line on the bill.


15                                                                                              d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                              (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program         Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                  Change Needed

     MUN-76300        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry           arcshrct                                           If the Paid By check box is selected in the
                              Receivable                                                                                                  Accounts Receivable User Preferences program to
                                                                                                                                          retain the paid-by customer during miscellaneous
                                                                                                                                          payment entry, the program retains the name from
                                                                                                                                          the previous receipt entered in the Paid By box on
                                                                                                                                          the Miscellaneous Receipts screen when you add
                                                                                                                                          subsequent receipts.

     MUN-72730        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry           arcshrct                                           If you are entering miscellaneous cash receipts
                              Receivable                                                                                                  and begin to add a prepayment on the Apply
                                                                                                                                          Prepayments screen to a parcel or property that
                                                                                                                                          has prior year unpaid bills associated with it, the
                                                                                                                                          program displays a message informing you that
                                                                                                                                          prior year unpaid bills exist for the parcel or
                                                                                                                                          property. You can then choose whether or not to
                                                                                                                                          view the bills associated with the parcel or property
                                                                                                                                          ID before you apply the prepayment or cancel the
                                                                                                                                          prepayment process.


     MUN-66066        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry           arcshrct                                           If you do not have permissions to enter cash
                              Receivable                                                                                                  receipts, the program displays messages and does
                                                                                                                                          not allow you to continue the payment entry
                                                                                                                                          process.
     MUN-73387        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry           arcshrct                                           If you have selected bills for a customer and add
                              Receivable                                                                                                  bills to the active set for another customer on the
                                                                                                                                          Customer Find screen, the program changes the
                                                                                                                                          customer name in the Name box under Bill
                                                                                                                                          Information to "VARIOUS," adds the new bills to
                                                                                                                                          the set of bills on the screen, and updates all
                                                                                                                                          totals.
                                                                                                                                          The program also includes all bills and totals for
                                                                                                                                          multiple customers under the customer name
                                                                                                                                          "VARIOUS" in reports.
     MUN-62548        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry           arcshrct                                           Master forms RCTGB80 and RCTMS80 have been
                              Receivable                                                                                                  restored to their respective states prior to Munis
                                                                                                                                          version 8.1. Their post Munis version 8.1 states
                                                                                                                                          have been made into new master forms
                                                                                                                                          RCTGB80A and RCTMS80A respectively.
     MUN-75067        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry           arcshrct                                           The Customer to Assign Refund to in Payment
                              Receivable                                                                                                  Entry list is available under Preferences on the
                                                                                                                                          General Options tab of the Accounts Receivable
                                                                                                                                          User Preferences screen. This list indicates the
                                                                                                                                          customer account to which the Payment Entry
                                                                                                                                          program assigns a refund record. You can choose
                                                                                                                                          to have refund records assigned to the billed
                                                                                                                                          customer's account or the paid-by customer's
                                                                                                                                          account, or select Prompt to have the program
                                                                                                                                          display a message during refund processing for
                                                                                                                                          which you can choose the customer account (billed
                                                                                                                                          or paid-by) to which to assign the refund.

     MUN-59406        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry           arcshrct, arrecinq, arcommon                       The Image (camera) button is available on the
                              Receivable                                                                                                  toolbar of the Completing Receipts screen and a
                                                                                                                                          new document type has been added in Tyler
                                                                                                                                          Content Manager (TCM) to accommodate
                                                                                                                                          documents related to a receipt. This document
                                                                                                                                          type allows you to add documents to TCM when
                                                                                                                                          you are completing a receipt through the Payment
                                                                                                                                          Entry program. These TCM documents can be
                                                                                                                                          retrieved and viewed from the Receipt Inquiry
                                                                                                                                          program.




16                                                                               d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                            (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                              Change Needed

     MUN-64125        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry                         arcshrct                                         The logic that submits a document to Tyler Content
                              Receivable                                                                                                              Manager (TCM) during the completion of a multiple-
                                                                                                                                                      receipt transaction has been modified to update
                                                                                                                                                      the TCM key information after all receipts have
                                                                                                                                                      been processed. Regardless of the initial key
                                                                                                                                                      information present when submitting a document,
                                                                                                                                                      the TCM document is now linked to the final
                                                                                                                                                      receipt of the transaction.

     MUN-61131        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry                         artrnsfr                                         The payment allocation process no longer causes
                              Receivable                                                                                                              an endless input verification loop that caused the
                                                                                                                                                      Payment Entry program to fail.
     MUN-72488        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry                         arcshrct                                         The Payment Entry browse screen includes a
                              Receivable                                                                                                              Source column that identifies the program from
                                                                                                                                                      which each batch originated. The source does not
                                                                                                                                                      indicate the origin of the receipts in a batch
                                                                                                                                                      because a batch can contain receipts from more
                                                                                                                                                      than one source.
     MUN-57750        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry                         arcshrct                                         The Print GL Accounts check box is available for
                              Receivable                                                                                                              entry when you are completing a receipt that
                                                                                                                                                      includes multiple charges. If this check box is
                                                                                                                                                      selected, the program includes general ledger
                                                                                                                                                      account information in miscellaneous payment
                                                                                                                                                      receipts.
     MUN-60390        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry                         arcshrct                                         The program correctly includes overpayment
                              Receivable                                                                                                              amounts in the list of charges on the Charge Detail
                                                                                                                                                      Distribution screen.
     MUN-71557        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry                         arcshrct                                         The program does not fail when you process a
                              Receivable                                                                                                              business license (AR category 55) payment, and
                                                                                                                                                      then a real estate (AR category 20) payment (using
                                                                                                                                                      summary receipt SUMRCT40).
     MUN-62527        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry                         arcshrct                                         The program includes cash account information for
                              Receivable                                                                                                              Utility Billing deposits on miscellaneous cash
                                                                                                                                                      receipts.
     MUN-60778        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry                         arpaydet                                         The program no longer generates the "Prepare
                              Receivable                                                                                                              allocation cursors failed" error.
     MUN-67060        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry                         arpaydet                                         The program successfully applies partial payments
                              Receivable                                                                                                              that have been allocated to charge groups.

     MUN-72840        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry                         arcshrct                                         When a customer pays off a payment plan early,
                              Receivable                                                                                                              the program correctly does not change the
                                                                                                                                                      principal due amount. The payment schedule and
                                                                                                                                                      bills therefore show the correct totals.

     MUN-62484        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry                         arcshrct                                         When you reverse a receipt by using the Batch
                              Receivable                                                                                                              Total link in the Batch Information panel, the
                                                                                                                                                      program correctly advances the Receipt Count
                                                                                                                                                      number.
     MUN-70123        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry                         arcshrct                                         When you select 9 - Multiple from the Payment
                              Receivable                                                                                                              Method list on the Completing Receipt screen and
                                                                                                                                                      make changes to payment methods on the
                                                                                                                                                      Payment Method Allocation screen, the program
                                                                                                                                                      retains your changes.
     MUN-69280        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry - Miscellaneous         arcshrct                                         If you choose a printing option on the Completing
                              Receivable                       Receipts                                                                               Receipts screen, but type 0 in the Receipt Copies
                                                                                                                                                      box to not print a receipt for the current payment
                                                                                                                                                      transaction, the program creates an image of the
                                                                                                                                                      receipt when receipt entry is complete so that a
                                                                                                                                                      duplicate receipt can later be printed from the
                                                                                                                                                      Receipt Inquiry program.

     MUN-67265        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Entry, Payment Reversals      arcshrct, arrefrev                               When payments are reversed out of order, the
                              Receivable                                                                                                              reversal process does not allocate the reversed
                                                                                                                                                      interest to other receipts as held interest; however,
                                                                                                                                                      it does update the bill itself with the reversed
                                                                                                                                                      interest as held interest.

17                                                                                             d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                          (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                             Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                         Change Needed

     MUN-65279        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Link Routine           arpaydet                                         When it applies payments by charge, the routine
                              Receivable                                                                                                       correctly applies payment to the due now amounts
                                                                                                                                               for all charges before it applies payment to due
                                                                                                                                               amounts on any charge.
     MUN-64811        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Redistribution         arpmtdst, archgobj                               Changes made to the program decrease
                              Receivable                                                                                                       processing time.
     MUN-62932        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Reversals              arrefrev                                         Changes made to the nonsufficient funds (NSF)
                              Receivable                                                                                                       reversal process reduce the time it takes for the
                                                                                                                                               program to display the Non-Sufficient Funds
                                                                                                                                               Reversal screen.
     MUN-65412        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Reversals              arrefrev                                         If you start, and then cancel the reversal process,
                              Receivable                                                                                                       and the Enter NSF Information is selected on the
                                                                                                                                               Receipt Reversal screen, the program successfully
                                                                                                                                               cancels the process without reversing the receipt.

     MUN-66932        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Reversals              arrefrev                                         The Add NSF Special Condition/Notes check box
                              Receivable                                                                                                       replaces the Apply a NSF Special Condition Code
                                                                                                                                               check box on the Non-sufficient Funds Reversal
                                                                                                                                               screen. Select this check box to add a NSF special
                                                                                                                                               conditional code and/or a note about the reversal
                                                                                                                                               to the customer's account. If you select this check
                                                                                                                                               box, the NSF Special Condition list is available.
                                                                                                                                               You can select a special condition code from the
                                                                                                                                               list to use for the reversal or leave the default blank
                                                                                                                                               value if you only want to add or update a note in
                                                                                                                                               the Notes box on the screen.


     MUN-73159        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payment Reversals              arrefrev                                         The Multi Rcpt Transaction button is active (folder
                              Receivable                                                                                                       icon on button is yellow) on the Receipt History
                                                                                                                                               screen when the current receipt is part of a multiple-
                                                                                                                                               receipt transaction.
                                                                                                                                               If multiple receipts are associated with the current
                                                                                                                                               receipt transaction record on the Receipt History
                                                                                                                                               screen and you click Reverse, the program
                                                                                                                                               displays a message for which you can choose
                                                                                                                                               whether or not to reverse all receipts in the
                                                                                                                                               transaction. If you click Yes to reverse all receipts
                                                                                                                                               in the transaction, the program also allows you to
                                                                                                                                               apply a non-sufficient funds (NSF) fee to the
                                                                                                                                               transaction. When you choose this option, the
                                                                                                                                               program always applies the NSF fee to the bill
                                                                                                                                               associated with the last receipt in the multiple-
                                                                                                                                               receipt transaction. If you click No to only reverse
                                                                                                                                               the current transaction, the program does not give
                                                                                                                                               you the option of applying the NSF fee.


     MUN-70477        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payments Journal               arrctpst                                         If you are posting batches and type a posting year
                              Receivable                                                                                                       in the GL Year box on the Output Options dialog
                                                                                                                                               box that is prior to the current year, the program
                                                                                                                                               places the default value of 13 in the GL Period box
                                                                                                                                               and it cannot be changed.
     MUN-73747        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payments Journal               arrctpst                                         Payments Journal reports can display receipt
                              Receivable                                                                                                       amounts and total amounts up to 999,999,999.99.

     MUN-65305        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payments Journal               arrctpst                                         The program allows you to type a range of dates or
                              Receivable                                                                                                       a series of specific dates in the Entry Date box on
                                                                                                                                               the Payments Journal program.
                                                                                                                                               To search for a range of dates, type the beginning
                                                                                                                                               and ending dates in the boxes and separate them
                                                                                                                                               with a colon, for example:
                                                                                                                                               01/01/2010:12/31/2010
                                                                                                                                               To search for a series of dates, type the specific
                                                                                                                                               dates and separate them with a pipe, for example:
                                                                                                                                               01/01/2010|01/03/2010|01/04/2010

18                                                                                      d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                            (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                 Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                         Change Needed

     MUN-69800        0       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payments Journal                arrctpst                                           The program returns receipts to an unposted status
                              Receivable                                                                                                          if an error prevents a receipt batch from posting
                                                                                                                                                  after updates have already begun.
     MUN-61567        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Payments Journal                arrctpst                                           When viewing the list of batches on the Maintain
                              Receivable                                                                                                          tab, you can click the Word or Excel buttons on the
                                                                                                                                                  toolbar to export the list of batches to Microsoft®
                                                                                                                                                  Word or Excel.
     MUN-65978        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Penalty Calculation             arcalpen                                           The penalty calculation process no longer
                              Receivable                                                                                                          calculates penalty on all installments as soon as
                                                                                                                                                  the installment one penalty date has passed.

     MUN-61141        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Posted Payments Reports         arpstpmt                                           The default values for the Date and GL
                              Receivable                                                                                                          Year/Period lists under Date/Period Range on the
                                                                                                                                                  Posted Payment Report screen are "Today" and
                                                                                                                                                  "Current Year/Period."
     MUN-61795        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Print Receipt Images            arrctimg                                           The program can successfully print duplicate
                              Receivable                                                                                                          receipts to the Epson receipt printer for validator
                                                                                                                                                  ports that are up to fifty characters in length.

     MUN-69859        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Process Lockbox File            arlckbox                                           The ability to apply a lockbox payment to a
                              Receivable                                                                                                          specified installment number when using the Munis
                                                                                                                                                  Standard Lockbox or Munis Questpoint Lockbox
                                                                                                                                                  format has been restored.
     MUN-70236        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Process Lockbox File            arlckbox                                           The program allows you to successfully apply a
                              Receivable                                                                                                          lockbox payment to a bill with a penalty-on-the-fly
                                                                                                                                                  charge that has accrued interest.
     MUN-69749        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Process Lockbox File            arwrtoff                                           The program resets the values in the Effective
                              Receivable                                                                                                          Date and GL Year/Period fields to the current date
                                                                                                                                                  and GL year and period each time you click
                                                                                                                                                  Define.
     MUN-72909        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Process Lockbox File            arlckbox                                           The Property Lockbox Payment Report file format
                              Receivable                                                                                                          has been updated to allow processing of payments
                                                                                                                                                  by Category, Year, Installment Number, and
                                                                                                                                                  Property Code. When processed, the program
                                                                                                                                                  applies payments to a property code using the
                                                                                                                                                  specified year, category and installment number.

     MUN-67277        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Process Lockbox File            arlckbox                                           The Standard and Questpoint Payment Report file
                              Receivable                                                                                                          formats available in the Process Lockbox File
                                                                                                                                                  program have been updated to accommodate two-
                                                                                                                                                  digit installments or cycles. This allows payment of
                                                                                                                                                  specific wage tax cycles to be correctly processed
                                                                                                                                                  and allocated through the program.

     MUN-73652        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Process Lockbox Files           arlckbox                                           On accounts that do not have any valid bills due,
                              Receivable                                                                                                          the program applies overpayments to the newest
                                                                                                                                                  bill in the system.
     MUN-65233        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Process Lockbox Files           arlckbox                                           The program correctly applies bill payments made
                              Receivable                                                                                                          through the lockbox process to the property and in
                                                                                                                                                  the correct payment order.
                                                                                                                                                  If a single full payment is made through the
                                                                                                                                                  lockbox process and discount amounts apply, the
                                                                                                                                                  program allocates the amounts to the correct
                                                                                                                                                  installment if one out of four installments is due.

     MUN-63098        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Process Lockbox Files           arcshrct, argendis, arlckbox                       The program correctly does not calculate negative
                              Receivable                                                                                                          discounts for bills taking a credit.




19                                                                                       d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                           (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                         Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                            Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Change Needed

     MUN-74861        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Query Due Amounts Web Service           arwscrct                                         The Web service has been modified so that only a
                              Receivable                                                                                                                specific bill year can be used in property searches.
                                                                                                                                                        The PriorYearUnpaidBills node has also been
                                                                                                                                                        added. When the value for the node for real estate
                                                                                                                                                        and personal property bills is "Y", it indicates that
                                                                                                                                                        prior year unpaid bills exist for the property with a
                                                                                                                                                        bill year prior to the one on the bill for the same AR
                                                                                                                                                        category. The value of the node is "N" if prior year
                                                                                                                                                        bills do not exist for a bill. New nodes have also
                                                                                                                                                        been added for the original, adjusted, and abated
                                                                                                                                                        amounts at both the line level and the installment
                                                                                                                                                        level.

     MUN-67289        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Reconciliation Report                   arrcnrpt                                         The program is Munis® Scheduler-enabled. For
                              Receivable                                                                                                                sites that use Munis Scheduler, the Use the
                                                                                                                                                        Execute the Report list is available under
                                                                                                                                                        Scheduling and allows you to process a single
                                                                                                                                                        import without Scheduler (Now) or in the
                                                                                                                                                        background with Scheduler (In Background (Now)),
                                                                                                                                                        or to schedule processing of imports or reports at a
                                                                                                                                                        specific time or on a recurring basis (At a
                                                                                                                                                        Scheduled Time).

                                                                                                                                                        The GL Year, GL Period, and GL Effective Date
                                                                                                                                                        lists are available under General Ledger on the
                                                                                                                                                        Reconciliation Report screen. You can use the lists
                                                                                                                                                        to choose whether to include general ledger
                                                                                                                                                        activity in the report for a relative or specific
                                                                                                                                                        general ledger year, period, or effective date. The
                                                                                                                                                        lists support the ability to use Munis Scheduler to
                                                                                                                                                        schedule the report process on a recurring basis.
                                                                                                                                                        Following are brief descriptions of the lists:
                                                                                                                                                        • The GL Year list allows you to choose to include
                                                                                                                                                        activity for the current or a prior year, or for a
                                                                                                                                                        specific range of years. If you select Specify Year
                                                                                                                                                        from the list, the program opens the year range
                                                                                                                                                        boxes beside the list for entry of the specific year
                                                                                                                                                        range.
                                                                                                                                                        • The GL Period list is available when you select
                                                                                                                                                        the GL Period option. This list allows you to
                                                                                                                                                        choose whether to include activity for the current or
                                                                                                                                                        a prior period, or for a specific range of periods. If
     MUN-63770        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Schedule of Departmental Payments       arcshrct                                         The program displays the following miscellaneous
                              Receivable                                                                                                                receipt descriptions in the report according to the
                                                                                                                                                        description that exists on a receipt:
                                                                                                                                                        • If the general ledger (GL) description exists on
                                                                                                                                                        the receipt, the program includes the GL
                                                                                                                                                        description for the receipt in the report.
                                                                                                                                                        • If the user-entered charge description exists on
                                                                                                                                                        the receipt, the program includes the user-entered
                                                                                                                                                        charge description for the receipt in the report.
                                                                                                                                                        • If neither the GL description nor the user-entered
                                                                                                                                                        charge description exists on the receipt, the
                                                                                                                                                        program includes the charge code description for
                                                                                                                                                        the receipt in the report.


     MUN-67176        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Setoff Debt Processing                  arsetoff                                         The program does not allow you to change the
                              Receivable                                                                                                                status of the debt setoff record to Final if a debt
                                                                                                                                                        amount exists on the record.
     MUN-67565        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts   Start/Stop Interest Calculation         arspcint                                         The program successfully processes the stop-
                              Receivable                                                                                                                interest special condition code without generating
                                                                                                                                                        a Microsoft® SQL transaction error.




20                                                                                               d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                           (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                      Primary Program                        Affected Program(s)       Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                Change Needed

     MUN-72264        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts        Tyler Dashboard - AR Collections       Dashboard                                     The following permission settings have been
                              Receivable                            Web Part                                                                             added to the AR Collections Web part:
                                                                                                                                                         • If a user has permissions to view all accounts
                                                                                                                                                         receivable (AR) codes in the Munis database, that
                                                                                                                                                         user can view collection information for all AR
                                                                                                                                                         codes on the Web part.
                                                                                                                                                         • If the user is limited to only have access to
                                                                                                                                                         specific AR codes in Munis, that user can only
                                                                                                                                                         view collection information for the AR codes to
                                                                                                                                                         which he or she is given access.
                                                                                                                                                         • If a user does not have permissions to view AR
                                                                                                                                                         codes in Munis, that user cannot view any
                                                                                                                                                         collection information on the Web part.
     MUN-61076        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts        Update Zip Codes/Addresses             arupdzip                                      The program includes the title ZIP CODE AND
                              Receivable                                                                                                                 ADDRESS EXPORT FILE on the export file of
                                                                                                                                                         names and addresses.
     MUN-66277        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts        Web Services                           arwscshg                                      The arwschsg_search_bills Web service accepts a
                              Receivable                                                                                                                 search key code of BAL_DUE_FLAG. If the value
                                                                                                                                                         of this search key is "Y" then the Web service only
                                                                                                                                                         returns bills that have a balance due on them.

     MUN-68641        3       Accounts Receivable - Accounts        Web Services                           arwscrct                                      The Installment nodes, such as <Installment1>,
                              Receivable                                                                                                                 <Installment2>, and so on that are child nodes of
                                                                                                                                                         the <Dates> node in the response XML file have
                                                                                                                                                         been renamed to include the word "Dates", for
                                                                                                                                                         example <Installment1Dates>,
                                                                                                                                                         <Installment2Dates>, and so on.

     MUN-65954        1       Accounts Receivable - Accounts        Web Services                           arwswebp                                      The Web payments Web service only sends a
                              Receivable                                                                                                                 payment confirmation e-mail if the AuthCode
                                                                                                                                                         attribute in the XML request is populated with a
                                                                                                                                                         value.
     MUN-65553        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts        Web Services                           arwsbinq                                      Web services include the penalty dates for bill
                              Receivable                                                                                                                 installments after the pen_dt1, pen_dt2, pen_dt3,
                                                                                                                                                         and pen_dt4 attributes in the XML response file.

     MUN-62698        2       Accounts Receivable - Accounts        Workflow Processing                                                                  The Workflow process codes ARR and REF are
                              Receivable                                                                                                                 invalid and unused; therefore they have been
                                                                                                                                                         removed from Workflow tables.
     MUN-66127        2       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Access Late Fees, Insufficient Funds   gblatfee, gbnsfnot                            References made to FEE type charge codes as
                                                                    Notices                                                                              being category zero through the Accounts
                                                                                                                                                         Receivable charge object process (archgobj) have
                                                                                                                                                         been removed. Under the archgobj changes, fees
                                                                                                                                                         now belong to the category defined under their
                                                                                                                                                         accounts receivable (AR) code.

     MUN-70519        1       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Aging Report                           aragerpt                                      The program correctly does not include bill activity
                                                                                                                                                         in the report that is audited on general billing
                                                                                                                                                         invoices for which the activity occurs after the
                                                                                                                                                         specified aging date.




21                                                                                                d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                         (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                      Primary Program                         Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                             Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         Change Needed

     MUN-60289        2       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Apply Deposits, Invoice Inquiry         gbinvinq, gbappdep                                 Apply Deposits
                                                                                                                                                               The following changes were made to the Apply
                                                                                                                                                               Deposits program:
                                                                                                                                                               • The Customer Number boxes are available on
                                                                                                                                                               the Apply Deposits screen. These boxes indicate
                                                                                                                                                               the range of customer numbers for the customers
                                                                                                                                                               for whom to apply deposits. You can type the
                                                                                                                                                               beginning and end of the range of customer
                                                                                                                                                               numbers in the boxes or type the same customer
                                                                                                                                                               number in each box to apply deposits for a single
                                                                                                                                                               customer.
                                                                                                                                                               • The Inquiry, Select All, and Clear All buttons are
                                                                                                                                                               available on the Review Deposits screen (formerly
                                                                                                                                                               the View Deposits screen).
                                                                                                                                                               You can click Select All to select all deposits for
                                                                                                                                                               which there is a deposit amount to apply; click
                                                                                                                                                               Clear All to clear the selection of all deposits; or
                                                                                                                                                               click Inquiry to view the invoice for a selected
                                                                                                                                                               deposit in the Invoice Inquiry program. You can
                                                                                                                                                               also click Update on the toolbar to select individual
                                                                                                                                                               deposits to apply or to reallocate deposit amounts.
                                                                                                                                                               NOTES:
                                                                                                                                                               • The program updates the total deposit amount for
                                                                                                                                                               a customer in the Amount Remaining box as
                                                                                                                                                               deposit check boxes are selected or cleared.
                                                                                                                                                               • The program includes all selected invoices with
                                                                                                                                                               an unpaid balance greater than zero even if there
                                                                                                                                                               are insufficient funds on deposit to apply an
                                                                                                                                                               amount to all of the invoices for a customer.
                                                                                                                                                               • In addition to the customer number, bill year,
                                                                                                                                                               invoice number, and deposit amount to apply for
                                                                                                                                                               each invoice, the Review Deposits screen contains
     MUN-79914        3       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Assess Late Fees                        gblatfee                                           the due date and unpaid balance for eachthat fall
                                                                                                                                                               The program correctly selects all records invoice.
                                                                                                                                                               within the search criteria.
     MUN-66678        3       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Create Employee Insurance Bills         gbempins; prgbcalc                                 The program correctly calculates employee
                                                                                                                                                               deduction amounts for calculation code 23.
     MUN-69272        3       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Create Employee Insurance Bills         gbempins                                           The program displays credits on the Employee
                                                                                                                                                               Credits screen (accessed by the Maintain Credits
                                                                                                                                                               button) for customers/employees that have
                                                                                                                                                               calculation code 23 deductions.
     MUN-68758        2       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Create Employee Insurance Bills         gbempins                                           The program displays credits on the Employee
                                                                                                                                                               Credits screen (accessed by the Maintain Credits
                                                                                                                                                               button) for customers/employees that have credits.

     MUN-70097        2       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Forgive Interest                        arfgvint                                           The 1 - General billing option is available on the
                                                                                                                                                               AR Category Range lists on the Forgive Interest
                                                                                                                                                               screen. You can select this option to forgive
                                                                                                                                                               interest on general billing invoices. If you select 1 -
                                                                                                                                                               General Billing from the beginning range list, the
                                                                                                                                                               program selects the same value as the default
                                                                                                                                                               value in the ending range list so that only general
                                                                                                                                                               billing invoice records are selected for output-post
                                                                                                                                                               processing.

     MUN-63194        1       Accounts Receivable - General Billing General Billing Landfill Import,        gbinvimp, gbpsinim, gbwmimpt                       The import process correctly updates the deferred
                                                                    General Billing Waste Management                                                           revenue account for imported invoices with cash
                                                                    File Import, Invoice Import                                                                accounting charge codes.

     MUN-67256        1       Accounts Receivable - General Billing General Billing Transfer to Tax         gbtaxtfr                                           The program no longer truncates the parcel
                                                                                                                                                               number when it compares the parcel on a General
                                                                                                                                                               Billing invoice to a parcel existing in the Munis
                                                                                                                                                               Property Tax module.
     MUN-64301        3       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Incident Report                         gbincrpt                                           The beginning default values for the Billing ID,
                                                                                                                                                               Owner ID, Associate 1 ID, and Associate 2 ID
                                                                                                                                                               range fields in the program have been returned to
                                                                                                                                                               zero.

22                                                                                                    d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                              (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                      Primary Program                      Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Change Needed

     MUN-54737        3       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Incident Report                      gbincrpt                                         When you search for incident records during the
                                                                                                                                                          define process, you can type or select dates in the
                                                                                                                                                          Incident Date and Closed Date range boxes to limit
                                                                                                                                                          record selection by specific ranges of incident or
                                                                                                                                                          closed dates, or leave the default blank values to
                                                                                                                                                          include records for all incident or closed dates in
                                                                                                                                                          record selection.

     MUN-75792        2       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Incidents                            gbincmnt                                         The program allows you to successfully import the
                                                                                                                                                          Computer Aided Dispatch (CAD) file of incidents.

     MUN-61174        3       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Incidents                            gbincmnt                                         When you generate an invoice for an incident, the
                                                                                                                                                          program correctly includes the parcel ID from the
                                                                                                                                                          incident record on the invoice.
     MUN-70484        3       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Invoice Entry and Proof              gbinvent                                         The date that displays under Entry Date for each
                                                                                                                                                          batch on the batch browse screen correctly
                                                                                                                                                          represents the date the batch was created.

     MUN-73687        2       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Invoice Entry and Proof              gbinvent                                         The program does not allow you to post invoices
                                                                                                                                                          for a closed year and period. If you attempt to
                                                                                                                                                          change the period, the program only allows you to
                                                                                                                                                          type 13 in the Per box at the top of the Proof
                                                                                                                                                          Header screen.
     MUN-67727        3       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Invoice Entry and Proof, Invoices    gbinvmnt                                         When you delete a posted invoice in the Invoices
                                                                                                                                                          program, the number of the deleted invoice can be
                                                                                                                                                          reused when an invoice is created in the Invoice
                                                                                                                                                          Entry and Proof program.
     MUN-66921        2       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Invoice Inquiry                      gbinvinq                                         The program successfully displays the browse
                                                                                                                                                          screen if there are invoices with messages over 40
                                                                                                                                                          characters long. The screen can display invoice
                                                                                                                                                          messages up to 80 characters long and if the
                                                                                                                                                          number of characters in the message exceeds 80
                                                                                                                                                          characters, the program only displays the first 80
                                                                                                                                                          characters of the message on the screen.

     MUN-78821        1       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Invoice Inquiry                      gbinvinq                                         When you open the Invoice Inquiry program from
                                                                                                                                                          another program, such as the Recurring Invoices
                                                                                                                                                          program, to view invoices associated with the
                                                                                                                                                          current invoice record, the Invoice Inquiry program
                                                                                                                                                          correctly finds and displays any associated
                                                                                                                                                          invoices.
     MUN-72608        2       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Invoices                             gbinvmnt                                         If the Update General Ledger check box is cleared
                                                                                                                                                          in the General Billing Settings program,
                                                                                                                                                          adjustments made in the Invoices program
                                                                                                                                                          correctly do not impact the general ledger.

     MUN-82697        1       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Invoices                             gbinvmnt                                         The program no longer generates an insert error
                                                                                                                                                          when you add additional general ledger allocation
                                                                                                                                                          lines.
     MUN-62187        3       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Open Accounts Receivable by          gbopnrec                                         The program can display line numbers up to 999
                                                                    Revenue Account                                                                       on the report.
     MUN-83176        1       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Print Invoices                       gbinvprt                                         If you select the Create Export File check box for
                                                                                                                                                          the program to create an export file of invoices, the
                                                                                                                                                          program also allows you to print invoices or to
                                                                                                                                                          save a report of invoices in the Munis spool
                                                                                                                                                          directory. When you click Export to create the
                                                                                                                                                          export file, the program creates the file in the
                                                                                                                                                          Munis export directory.
     MUN-67400        2       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Print Invoices                       gbinvprt                                         The "Duplicate Invoice" label that displays on
                                                                                                                                                          duplicate invoices has been moved to a different
                                                                                                                                                          location on the invoice to facilitate the printing of
                                                                                                                                                          invoices on TylerForms forms.
     MUN-61774        3       Accounts Receivable - General Billing Print Invoices                       gbinvprt                                         The Export File Name box is available when you
                                                                                                                                                          select the Create Export File check box on the
                                                                                                                                                          Print Invoices screen. You can type up to eight
                                                                                                                                                          characters for the export file name in the box.

23                                                                                                 d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                          (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module              Primary Program                        Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                               Change Needed

     MUN-63944        2       Financials - GL - Budgeting   Budget Amendment Entry                 bgamdent                                            The program now enters default information from
                                                                                                                                                       the previous detail line when you are entering a
                                                                                                                                                       new detail line. This is intended to speed up data
                                                                                                                                                       entry.

     MUN-62117        0       Financials - GL - Budgeting   Budget Amendment Entry                 bgamdent                                            When entering a budget amendment for next year
                                                                                                                                                       that is to become part of the original budget for the
                                                                                                                                                       account, the program displays a dialog box that
                                                                                                                                                       states that the account must also be included in a
                                                                                                                                                       budget projection.
     MUN-60398        2       Financials - GL - Budgeting   Budget Central                         Budget Central                                      Accounts that do not contain a project code now
                                                                                                                                                       display properly when Project Code is included in
                                                                                                                                                       the Manage Segments list.
     MUN-62135        0       Financials - GL - Budgeting   Budget Completion Journal              bgcmpjnl                                            Carry-forward budget amendments no longer
                                                                                                                                                       display in the Transfer In field for type 2 multiyear
                                                                                                                                                       funds. These amendments are also excluded from
                                                                                                                                                       the folder button display for the Transfer in field.

     MUN-62126        0       Financials - GL - Budgeting   Budget Completion Journal              bgcmpjnl                                            Multiyear budget amendments for the next year
                                                                                                                                                       now only display in the current year.

     MUN-65874        0       Financials - GL - Budgeting   Budget Completion Journal              bgcmpjnl, glactinq                                  The Budget Completion Journal program now
                                                                                                                                                       includes carry forward budget amendments in the
                                                                                                                                                       transfers and revised budget for multiyear 2
                                                                                                                                                       expense accounts.

     MUN-36687        3       Financials - GL - Budgeting   Budget Completion Journal, Budget      bgcmpjnl, glclosyr, bgamdent,                       The Open New Fiscal year program now creates
                                                            Transfers and Amendments, Month        glmoendp                                            carry-forward budget adjustments for purchase
                                                            End Processing, Open New Fiscal                                                            orders and contracts for sites that use carry-
                                                            Year                                                                                       forward method 1 or 3. You can also select to not
                                                                                                                                                       create these adjustments, by clearing the check
                                                                                                                                                       box.
                                                                                                                                                       Budgets are now rolled from the current year to
                                                                                                                                                       prior year for multiyear type 2 expense accounts, in
                                                                                                                                                       addition to annual accounts. This change removes
                                                                                                                                                       the restriction of including accounts that needed
                                                                                                                                                       carry-forward adjustments in a budget projection.
                                                                                                                                                       The budget completion process is now consistent
                                                                                                                                                       with the open and close year processes. You now
                                                                                                                                                       select the Define option, Output/Post, and confirm
                                                                                                                                                       the posting after the journals have been selected.


     MUN-70174        1       Financials - GL - Budgeting   Budget Completion Journal/Update       bgcmpjnl                                            The program now displays a full error/warning
                                                                                                                                                       description.
     MUN-59294        3       Financials - GL - Budgeting   Budget Module                          bgdeptrq, bgnyrpts, glgcprnt                        Budget programs now store account level text
                                                                                                                                                       notes as a text record. The programs now contain
                                                                                                                                                       Detail Level Description, and Justification options,
                                                                                                                                                       which are also stored as text records.


     MUN-68540        2       Financials - GL - Budgeting   Budget Transfers and Amendments        bgamdent, bgamdact                                  The program now properly applies Workflow
                                                                                                                                                       bypass permissions when determining if a transfer
                                                                                                                                                       should be routed as a BGT or BGA process.

     MUN-74671        1       Financials - GL - Budgeting   Certification of Resources             bgcertrs                                            Selecting a line from the Browse screen now
                                                                                                                                                       opens that record.
                                                                                                                                                       For sites that balance to fund/subfund, when
                                                                                                                                                       choosing Certification for a cash account in Next
                                                                                                                                                       Year budget Entry, the displayed totals now only
                                                                                                                                                       include accounts within the fund/subfund of the
                                                                                                                                                       cash account.
     MUN-75524        1       Financials - GL - Budgeting   Define/Start Budget Projection         bgprojmt                                            You can no longer update entity codes, unless one
                                                                                                                                                       has not yet been entered.
                                                                                                                                                       The screen that displays the number of account
                                                                                                                                                       records included in the projection now displays up
                                                                                                                                                       to 999,999,999.
24                                                                                           d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                             (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                      Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                            Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                              Change Needed

     MUN-78595        1       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Entry               bgdeptrq                                         Closing the program after updating the detail
                                                                                                                                                     header no longer causes budget miscalculations.

     MUN-72963        1       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Entry               bgdeptrq                                         Deleting an account from a projection now causes
                                                                                                                                                     the program to display the correct next record on
                                                                                                                                                     both the main screen, and the Account Info screen.

     MUN-79929        2       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Entry               bgdeptrq                                         Next Year Budget Entry now exports only those
                                                                                                                                                     budget levels that have been defined in the
                                                                                                                                                     General Ledger Settings program.
     MUN-59289        0       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Entry               bgdeptrq                                         The Detail Info screen now only attempts to verify
                                                                                                                                                     field values that are applicable to the input detail
                                                                                                                                                     type.

     MUN-59616        1       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Entry               bgdeptrq                                         The Detail Info screen now uses the correct
                                                                                                                                                     account type to determine when to change the
                                                                                                                                                     plus/minus sign for amounts.
     MUN-72952        1       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Entry               bgdeptrq                                         The program deletes the correct detail record,
                                                                                                                                                     instead of deleting the last detail record in the set.

     MUN-73496        2       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Entry               bgdeptrq                                         The program no longer allows updates to the
                                                                                                                                                     detailed description outside of the Detail Info
                                                                                                                                                     screen.
     MUN-78377        1       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Entry               bgdeptrq                                         The program no longer closes when you attempt to
                                                                                                                                                     update detail fields with invalid values.

     MUN-76529        1       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Entry               bgdeptrq                                         The program now only edits fields related to the
                                                                                                                                                     current detail record type.
     MUN-73568        3       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Entry               bgdeptrq                                         The program provides a selection of rounding
                                                                                                                                                     options for use with the Percent Change function.

     MUN-72941        1       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Entry               bgdeptrq                                         The program's Projection Detail screen no longer
                                                                                                                                                     displays the Update, and insert buttons on the
                                                                                                                                                     Munis toolbar for users who have view-only
                                                                                                                                                     permissions.
     MUN-68025        3       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Entry               bgdeptrq                                         Updates made to the Monthly tab now display
                                                                                                                                                     immediately, and current and last year actuals
                                                                                                                                                     display correctly.
     MUN-72921        0       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Entry               bgdeptrq                                         Updating budget detail records from the Detail tab
                                                                                                                                                     on the Account Info screen now updates both the
                                                                                                                                                     detail records, and the account amounts.

     MUN-61492        2       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Report              bgnyrpts                                         The program correctly displays account numbers
                                                                                                                                                     longer than 41 characters.

     MUN-61476        1       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Reports             bgnyrpts                                         The Include Employees with Benefit Detail check
                                                                                                                                                     box now functions correctly.

     MUN-62972        1       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Next Year Budget Reports             bgnyrpts                                         The program no longer experiences an error when
                                                                                                                                                     you change from Report 6 to Report 3.

     MUN-65854        1       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Roll/Factor/Merge Projection         bgrollmg                                         When merging projections, the program now
                                                                                                                                                     displays a warning which contains the projection
                                                                                                                                                     amounts that will be lost for accounts that exist in
                                                                                                                                                     both projections. The program also displays record
                                                                                                                                                     counts for each step of the roll/factor/merge
                                                                                                                                                     process.
     MUN-59300        1       Financials - GL - Budgeting      Roll/Merge Projection                bgrollmg                                         The program no longer encounters errors related
                                                                                                                                                     to multiyear budget projections.

     MUN-77447        3       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Adjustments and Retirements          famstmnt                                         The program no longer allows updates to asset tag
                                                                                                                                                     numbers if the Require Asset Tag option is
                                                                                                                                                     enabled.




25                                                                                            d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                           (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                      Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                Change Needed

     MUN-68115        2       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Adjustments and Retirements          famstmnt                                            The program no longer allows you to set a retired
                                                                                                                                                        asset to a status of CIP, which would allow it to be
                                                                                                                                                        deleted in the New Assets program.

     MUN-60324        2       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Asset List by GL Account             faglalst                                            Amounts can now total up to $99,999,999,999.99.


     MUN-60088        2       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Asset List by GL Account             faglalst                                            The program now contains a check box that allows
                                                                                                                                                        you to select whether the program uses the current
                                                                                                                                                        book value, or the acquisition cost.

     MUN-76341        1       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Capital Asset Disclosure             facapdis                                            The Capital Asset Disclosure report now correctly
                                                                                                                                                        performs all calculations when an asset is new in
                                                                                                                                                        the reporting year, and has been adjusted, or
                                                                                                                                                        depreciated.
     MUN-81122        1       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Depreciate Assets                    fadeprec                                            When an asset is fully depreciated, the last year
                                                                                                                                                        and period for depreciation now represent the last
                                                                                                                                                        period depreciation was taken for the asset,
                                                                                                                                                        instead of the depreciate through period specified
                                                                                                                                                        for the depreciation run.
     MUN-59522        3       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Fixed Asset Module                   fadeprec, faentpst, famstmnt,                       Asset depreciation can now be tracked by grant.
                                                                                                    famwkmnt, fadeprpt                                  Project accounts are attached to the account used
                                                                                                                                                        to purchase the asset, and stored in fixed asset
                                                                                                                                                        records.
     MUN-71351        3       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Fixed Asset Module                   faparmnt, fadeprec, famstmnt,                       Fixed Asset programs can now depreciate assets
                                                                                                    famwkmnt                                            based on a half-year convention.
     MUN-68783        1       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Fixed Asset Transaction Entry Post   faentpst                                            The program no longer allows you to post
                                                                                                                                                        transactions outside your permitted year/period
                                                                                                                                                        range if you do not have period override
                                                                                                                                                        permissions.
     MUN-64208        1       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Fixed Asset Transaction Entry Post   faentpst                                            The program no longer creates duplicate journals
                                                                                                                                                        when posting is cancelled, and then reposted.


     MUN-64591        2       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Fixed Asset Transaction Entry Post   faentpst                                            The Workflow buttons now properly activate when
                                                                                                                                                        a record is pending approval.

     MUN-78436        1       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Fixed Asset Transaction Entry Post   faentpst                                            When retiring an asset that is fully depreciated, the
                                                                                                                                                        program no longer sets the last year and period for
                                                                                                                                                        depreciation to zero. Instead, the program retains
                                                                                                                                                        the most recent values.

     MUN-70729        2       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Fixed Asset Work File                famwkmnt                                            The program properly sets sequence numbers
                                                                                                                                                        when you improve or update an asset using a date
                                                                                                                                                        other than the current date.

     MUN-66169        1       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Fixed Asset Work File                famwkmnt                                            When a tag number is specified on a work file, it is
                                                                                                                                                        used as the asset number when creating a fixed
                                                                                                                                                        asset.
     MUN-68871        1       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Fixed Asset Work File                famwkmnt                                            You can now make improvements to non-
                                                                                                                                                        capitalized assets that do not have accounts set
                                                                                                                                                        up.

     MUN-68860        1       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Fixed Asset Work File                fawmkmnt                                            You can now successfully perform multiple
                                                                                                                                                        improvements to the same asset on the same day.


     MUN-70786        3       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets   Fixed Asset Work File, New Assets    famwkmnt, famstmnt                                  The Fixed Asset Work File, and New Assets
                                                                                                                                                        programs now allow you to enter and store a
                                                                                                                                                        product ID when importing or adding an asset.
                                                                                                                                                        Product IDs are based on the selected commodity
                                                                                                                                                        code, and the Product ID field is not visible unless
                                                                                                                                                        you have enabled the functionality in the Purchase
                                                                                                                                                        Order Settings program.



26                                                                                           d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                              (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                   Primary Program                      Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                               Change Needed

     MUN-67693        2       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets     Fixed Asset Year End Process         fayrendp                                         The program no longer generates an error when
                                                                                                                                                       you select the Run History option, after performing
                                                                                                                                                       the year-end process.

     MUN-59068        3       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets     Fixed Assets Activity Report         faactvty                                         The report contains the correct page breaks, and
                                                                                                                                                       shorter descriptions as part of the output. The
                                                                                                                                                       program no longer generates a report if no records
                                                                                                                                                       are found that match the report criteria.

     MUN-64114        1       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets     Fixed Assets Discrepancy Report      fadiscrp                                         The program now allows description lengths of up
                                                                                                                                                       to 40 characters.
     MUN-62822        3       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets     GASB34 Report Writer                 faexrpwr                                         The GASB34 Report Writer now includes an
                                                                                                                                                       additional ten columns of data, to comply with
                                                                                                                                                       GASB34 1.17 import changes.
     MUN-63552        3       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets     New Assets                           famstmnt                                         When copying assets, the asset type is now
                                                                                                                                                       properly copied from the original.
     MUN-65533        0       Financials - GL - Fixed Assets     Post Last Year Adjustments           gllyclos                                         The Post Last Year Adjustments program no
                                                                                                                                                       longer experiences errors that prevent the
                                                                                                                                                       completion of the posting process.

     MUN-59302        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Account Audit                        glaudlst                                         The program displays a long account number when
                                                                                                                                                       your site uses the Long Account entry method. If a
                                                                                                                                                       long account number does not exist for an account,
                                                                                                                                                       the program displays the org/object/project
                                                                                                                                                       instead. The program displays an error message in
                                                                                                                                                       this situation, alerting you to the absence of the
                                                                                                                                                       long account number.

     MUN-62583        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Account Inquiry                      glactinq, glavlbud                               Account Inquiry now displays the correct carry
                                                                                                                                                       forward original budget amount.
     MUN-64051        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Account Inquiry                      glactinq                                         After selecting a folder button for detail, selecting
                                                                                                                                                       the Detail menu option now correctly displays all
                                                                                                                                                       detail for the selected parameters.
     MUN-36122        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Account Inquiry                      glactinq                                         On the Detail screen, the Invoice column is now
                                                                                                                                                       labeled Document.
                                                                                                                                                       The program automatically sets the account type
                                                                                                                                                       letter to uppercase when you are performing a Find
                                                                                                                                                       action.
                                                                                                                                                       Detail exports to Excel now include the voucher
                                                                                                                                                       number.
                                                                                                                                                       Negative actual amounts for revenues in the Last
                                                                                                                                                       Year 2 column now display in black.
     MUN-63005        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Account Mass Creation                glmassgn                                         The program no longer experiences an error
                                                                                                                                                       related to org codes that contain alphanumeric
                                                                                                                                                       characters.

     MUN-67021        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Account Mass Creation                glmassgn                                         The program now consistently creates reference
                                                                                                                                                       accounts for both the long account, and org/object
                                                                                                                                                       account entry methods.
     MUN-65705        3       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Account Mass Creation                glmassgn, glglmask                               The program now provides field help buttons for
                                                                                                                                                       each field.

     MUN-68501        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Account Master                       glclosyr, glmstmnt                               The Account Master program now generates a
                                                                                                                                                       warning message when a control account is
                                                                                                                                                       changed for a fund balance account. The message
                                                                                                                                                       indicates that the reference account should also be
                                                                                                                                                       changed for the expenditure and revenue control
                                                                                                                                                       accounts. This change also applies to budgetary
                                                                                                                                                       accounts.
     MUN-59753        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Account Master                       glmstmnt                                         When using long account entry, you can no longer
                                                                                                                                                       enter values for unused segments. These unused
                                                                                                                                                       segments must be zero-filled.

     MUN-60566        3       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Account Master, Chart of Account     glcoaseg                                         Check box labels are now consistent between the
                                                                 Segments                                                                              Account Master, and Chart of Account Segments
                                                                                                                                                       programs.

27                                                                                              d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                          (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                   Primary Program                     Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                         Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                               Change Needed

     MUN-61018        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Account Trial Balance               glatrbal                                            The report correctly applies page breaks and totals
                                                                                                                                                         by fund and subfund for sites that use the long
                                                                                                                                                         account entry method.
     MUN-75088        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Account Trial Balance               glatrbal                                            The report now excludes zero balance accounts, if
                                                                                                                                                         the only journal activity to the accounts are zero
                                                                                                                                                         amounts.
                                                                                                                                                         The record counter on the main screen can now
                                                                                                                                                         display up to 9,999,999,999.
     MUN-66319        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Annual Financial Audit File         glgaaudf                                            The program now complies with the SB389 -
                                                                                                                                                         Transparency in Government Act.

     MUN-68895        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Annual Financial Audit File         glgaaudf                                            The program successfully exports journal lines that
                                                                                                                                                         reference a vendor number that no longer exists in
                                                                                                                                                         the system, typically due to a vendor merge.


     MUN-68506        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Annual Financial Audit File         glgaaudf                                            When generating the Control Totals report, the
                                                                                                                                                         payment totals now include transactions having a
                                                                                                                                                         valid vendor and object code, as well as any object
                                                                                                                                                         code in the 1XX and 2XX series that does not have
                                                                                                                                                         a vendor.
     MUN-72168        3       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Automatic/Control Entries Update    glsrcset                                            When the program is run, it refreshes the UDA
                                                                                                                                                         source record, and two system-generated entry
                                                                                                                                                         records if they do not exist.
     MUN-70203        0       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Budget Completion Journal/Update    bgcmpjnl                                            The last year revised budget for multi-year Type 2
                                                                                                                                                         funds now includes carry forward amendments in
                                                                                                                                                         its total.
     MUN-59398        0       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Budget Completion Journal/Update    bgcmpjnl                                            When processing multiyear type 2 funds, the
                                                                                                                                                         transfers in, transfers out, and the revised budget
                                                                                                                                                         now roll from the current year into the prior year.

     MUN-73310        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Budget Completion Journal/Update,   glopenyr, bgcmpjnl, bgamdent,                       End of year historical tables now properly
                                                                 Budget Transfers and Amendments,    gllyclos                                            synchronize with general ledger last year fields.
                                                                 Open New Fiscal Year, Post Last                                                         The system now builds historical records for
                                                                 Year Adjustments                                                                        accounts when last year adjustments are made to
                                                                                                                                                         new accounts.
     MUN-76991        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Budget Transfers and Amendments     gljnlpst                                            Posting budget amendments for multiyear expense
                                                                                                                                                         accounts to the last fiscal year now correctly
                                                                                                                                                         updates the general ledger.
     MUN-76882        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Budget Transfers and Amendments     bgamdent                                            The program properly updates general ledger
                                                                                                                                                         history tables with the last year budget
                                                                                                                                                         amendments for new accounts that are set up after
                                                                                                                                                         year-end close.
     MUN-72242        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Budget Transfers and Amendments,    glimptje, bgamdent                                  The program now imports zero-dollar amounts
                                                                 Import Journals                                                                         when importing a one sided budget amendment
                                                                                                                                                         entry.
     MUN-62672        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Change General Ledger Account       glacctch, glcoaseg                                  The Change General Ledger Account Code, and
                                                                 Code, Chart of Account Segments                                                         Chart of Account Segments programs now display
                                                                                                                                                         an error message when you attempt to change an
                                                                                                                                                         org code that has null or missing segments.
                                                                                                                                                         The Chart of Account Segments program no longer
                                                                                                                                                         experiences looping errors.

     MUN-76462        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Change General Ledger Account       glacctch                                            In order to increase speed and prevent program
                                                                 Codes                                                                                   errors, the program no longer locks records during
                                                                                                                                                         processing.
     MUN-57882        3       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Change General Ledger Account       glacctch                                            The Batch Entry option can now be used for long
                                                                 Codes                                                                                   accounts.
     MUN-59312        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Change General Ledger Account       glacctch                                            The program now correctly processes long
                                                                 Codes                                                                                   accounts with unused segments, both in batch
                                                                                                                                                         mode and from an import file.
     MUN-64266        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Change General Ledger Account       glacctch                                            The program now runs at a more efficient speed.
                                                                 Codes
     MUN-72571        0       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Change General Ledger Account       glacctch                                            The program prevents you from performing
                                                                 Codes                                                                                   account changes that cross funds.
     MUN-82421        0       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Chart of Account Segments           glcoaseg                                            The program properly allows for the creation of
                                                                                                                                                         account segment codes to blank databases.
28                                                                                             d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                           (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                   Primary Program                      Affected Program(s)         Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                             Change Needed

     MUN-69204        3       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Chesapeake Payroll Synchronization   glsyncmt                                        The program has been updated with a variety of
                                                                                                                                                      minor changes as a result of Chesapeake-specific
                                                                                                                                                      testing.
     MUN-68054        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Close Current Fiscal Year            glclosyr                                        Updates of the end of year closing balances are
                                                                                                                                                      now correct for all accounts.

     MUN-69482        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Encumbrance Journal Entry/Proof      glencent                                        If the General Ledger Settings program is set to
                                                                                                                                                      allow the posting of encumbrances to revenue
                                                                                                                                                      accounts, the Encumbrance Journal Entry/Proof
                                                                                                                                                      program now allows entry against revenue
                                                                                                                                                      accounts without errors.
     MUN-71205        3       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Expense Inquiry, Funding Source      pastrmnt                                        The programs now contain a View Monthly Amount
                                                                 Inquiry                                                                              option.
     MUN-64467        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Export Journals                      glexptje                                        Export format C now abides by its original length of
                                                                                                                                                      221 characters.

     MUN-64705        0       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Export Journals                      glexptje                                        The Export Journals format V no longer includes
                                                                                                                                                      debits and credits on the same line.

     MUN-60668        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Export Journals                      glexptje                                        The report output no longer truncates debit and
                                                                                                                                                      credit amounts.
     MUN-73021        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Flexible Period Report               glflxrpt                                        Encumbrance amounts now include carry forward
                                                                                                                                                      encumbrances.
     MUN-60748        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Flexible Period Report               glflxrpt                                        The Flexible Period Report now runs at an
                                                                                                                                                      increased speed.

     MUN-73061        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Flexible Period Report               glflxrpt                                        The program no longer encounters an error when
                                                                                                                                                      you select the Include Journal Detail option.

     MUN-61007        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Flexible Period Report               glflxrpt                                        The program prints the full account number, and
                                                                                                                                                      descriptions on a separate line if they do no fit in
                                                                                                                                                      the available report space.
                                                                                                                                                      The report now contains a check box that allows
                                                                                                                                                      the report to print amounts in billions of dollars.
                                                                                                                                                      The Include Encumbrances check box functions
                                                                                                                                                      properly.


     MUN-59154        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Journal Entry/Proof          glcjeent                                        Clicking the Summary button prior to clicking the
                                                                                                                                                      Release button no longer bypasses certain
                                                                                                                                                      Workflow business rules.
     MUN-63422        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Journal Entry/Proof          glcjeent                                        GEN-type journals now properly allow the use of
                                                                                                                                                      both expense strings and funding strings for project
                                                                                                                                                      accounts.

     MUN-60883        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Journal Entry/Proof          glcjeent, gljnlpst                              The Current Year Actual amount displayed in the
                                                                                                                                                      CY Total Amount field no longer updates when you
                                                                                                                                                      change the budget year code for a general journal
                                                                                                                                                      in proof.
     MUN-68523        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Journal Entry/Proof          glcjeent                                        The program no longer changes the default year
                                                                                                                                                      and period of an unposted journal, when a user
                                                                                                                                                      who does not have period override permissions
                                                                                                                                                      attempts to access the journal outside their
                                                                                                                                                      available period range.
     MUN-73217        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Journal Entry/Proof          glcjeent                                        The program no longer encounters errors when
                                                                                                                                                      you enter a line without a project account string,
                                                                                                                                                      when the previous line did contain a project
                                                                                                                                                      account string.
     MUN-80715        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Journal Entry/Proof          glcjeent                                        The program no longer encounters invalid account
                                                                                                                                                      errors when modifying detail lines in the Genero
                                                                                                                                                      Web Client.
     MUN-71455        0       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Journal Entry/Proof          glcjeent                                        The program now locks accounts on a per-line
                                                                                                                                                      basis, instead of locking all accounts on all lines
                                                                                                                                                      for the duration of the editing or entry process.



29                                                                                             d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                         (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                   Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                         Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                              Change Needed

     MUN-70927        0       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Journal Entry/Proof           glcjeent                                         The program now only updates budget adjustment
                                                                                                                                                        amounts when the posting process is completed,
                                                                                                                                                        instead of during the proof stage.

     MUN-59635        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Journal Entry/Proof           gljnlpst                                         The program updates memo balances for
                                                                                                                                                        purchase order expense accounts, and control
                                                                                                                                                        accounts for sites that use the budgetary carry
                                                                                                                                                        forward method.

     MUN-60524        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Journal Entry/Proof           glcjeent                                         When posting a journal, error message windows
                                                                                                                                                        now contain more information regarding out of
                                                                                                                                                        balance journals.
     MUN-75970        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Ledger Encumbrance            glencute                                         The program no longer includes rejected contracts
                                                                                                                                                        as part of the Open PO/Contract/EE column.

     MUN-73874        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Ledger Module                 glglmask                                         Long Account fields now display the long object.

     MUN-73889        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Ledger Module                 menutree                                         Ohio-specific reports now appear on the Munis
                                                                                                                                                        menu.
     MUN-72476        3       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Ledger Module                 gljnlpst                                         Programs can now process entries that contain
                                                                                                                                                        both general ledger, and project accounting only
                                                                                                                                                        entries.
     MUN-69623        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Ledger Report Templates       glrpttmp, glreport                               The program now makes more accurate column
                                                                                                                                                        calculations, and Excel output formats have been
                                                                                                                                                        updated.
                                                                                                                                                        You can now select long account filter options.
     MUN-82823        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Ledger Requisition Amount     glfixreq                                         The program no longer encounters an interface
                                                                                                                                                        error.
     MUN-59591        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   General Ledger Settings               glparmnt, glwsvttt                               The program now contains settings options for
                                                                                                                                                        controlling Munis interaction with VersaTrans
                                                                                                                                                        Triptracker.
     MUN-70030        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Georgia Annual Financial Audit File   glgaaudf                                         The program now exports all accounts, regardless
                                                                                                                                                        of status.
     MUN-65456        3       Financials - GL - General Ledger   GL Tables Validation                  gltabval                                         Table validation messages are now clearer, and
                                                                                                                                                        more accurate. Messages related to general ledger
                                                                                                                                                        accounts now display the long account, if your site
                                                                                                                                                        uses the long account entry format.

     MUN-65270        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Historical Actuals Comparison         glactrpt                                         You can now complete the report process without
                                                                                                                                                        experiencing errors.

     MUN-63932        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Historical Actuals Comparison         glactrpt                                         You can now successfully print the report,
                                                                                                                                                        regardless of the number of records included on
                                                                                                                                                        the report.

     MUN-62042        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Indiana Form 9 Export                 glinrept                                         You can now properly create an Excel output from
                                                                                                                                                        the Browse screen when negative amounts exist
                                                                                                                                                        on the output.
     MUN-73095        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Indiana Form 9 Report                 glinrept                                         The Indiana Form 9 Report no longer overwrites
                                                                                                                                                        amounts when encumbrance is mapped to more
                                                                                                                                                        than one general ledger account.
     MUN-73189        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Journal Inquiry/Print                 glcjeinq                                         The Browse screen no longer shortens the debit
                                                                                                                                                        and credit amounts by a digit when browsing
                                                                                                                                                        journals.
     MUN-60015        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Journal Inquiry/Print                 glcjeinq                                         The program no longer truncates the long account
                                                                                                                                                        number on the Line Detail screen.

     MUN-56238        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Journal Inquiry/Print                 glcjeinq                                         The program now allows you to search by long
                                                                                                                                                        account within the Advanced Find screen.
     MUN-65755        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Journal Inquiry/Print                 gljnlpst                                         The program now includes the clerk ID for all
                                                                                                                                                        journal types.

     MUN-60210        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Journal Reversal                      gljnlpst                                         Reversal journals no longer display as out-of-
                                                                                                                                                        balance when they are in balance.

     MUN-72791        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Journal Reversal                      gljerevm                                         The Journal Reversal program can no longer
                                                                                                                                                        reverse Student Activity cash adjustments.
30                                                                                               d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                        (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                   Primary Program                        Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                         Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Change Needed

     MUN-63447        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Journal Reversal                       gljerevm                                           The program now retains the correct year for
                                                                                                                                                           journal reversals, instead of inserting the current
                                                                                                                                                           year for all reversals. The program also correctly
                                                                                                                                                           copies the values in the Ref1, Ref2, and Ref3
                                                                                                                                                           fields from the original journal.
     MUN-65715        3       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Louisiana Code Translations,           gllaafrm, gllaafre                                 The Louisiana Code Translations, and Louisiana
                                                                 Louisiana Export File Creation                                                            Export File Creation programs can now extract or
                                                                                                                                                           export by Fund and Project.
     MUN-67796        0       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Louisiana Export File Creation         gllaafre                                           The Louisiana Export File Creation program now
                                                                                                                                                           contains a check box that identifies charter school
                                                                                                                                                           sites.

     MUN-71678        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Major Fund Report                      glmajfnd                                           The program can now include both governmental
                                                                                                                                                           and proprietary funds in the 10% test report. You
                                                                                                                                                           must select the new check box to include both fund
                                                                                                                                                           types.
     MUN-74937        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Monthly Trial Balance by Fund          glmtrbal                                           When selecting all accounts, the report now
                                                                                                                                                           excludes expenditure and revenue control
                                                                                                                                                           accounts.
     MUN-66599        3       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Ohio State AFR Report                  glohrept, glsegcrf                                 The Ohio State AFR Report is now available. This
                                                                                                                                                           program is responsible for creating state-mandated
                                                                                                                                                           reports for Ohio sites.
     MUN-59657        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Open New Fiscal Year                   glopenyr                                           The program no longer creates a journal proof
                                                                                                                                                           report for sites that use the budgetary carry
                                                                                                                                                           forward method.

     MUN-70936        3       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Post Last Year Adjustments             gllyclos                                           The program now updates historical tables
                                                                                                                                                           whenever last year fields are updated on the
                                                                                                                                                           master tables.
                                                                                                                                                           The program no longer closes when attempting to
                                                                                                                                                           update the glmaster historical table.
     MUN-73039        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Print Report Templates, Report         glrpttmp, glreport                                 For sites using carry forward method 1, the
                                                                 Templates                                                                                 programs now correctly save report columns
                                                                                                                                                           selected during input.
     MUN-70633        3       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Project Accounting Module              gljnlpst, patrnlnk, pajnlpst                       Receipts from the Accounts Receivable module
                                                                                                                                                           now properly apply to the project ledger.

     MUN-59582        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Recurring Journal Entry and Generate glrecjre                                             The Detail screen properly displays long account
                                                                                                                                                           numbers.
     MUN-63543        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Recurring Journal Entry/Generate       glrecrje                                           The program no longer encounters errors when
                                                                                                                                                           attempting to modify or create a recurring journal
                                                                                                                                                           entry.
     MUN-73107        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Report Formatter Print Reports         glrptprt                                           Selecting multiple project codes no longer causes
                                                                                                                                                           the program to experience an error.
     MUN-69906        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Rhode Island Report Export             glrirept                                           The program now exports revenue amounts as a
                                                                                                                                                           positive value.

     MUN-74091        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Rhode Island Report Export             glrirept                                           The report no longer includes accounts for which
                                                                                                                                                           both the actual and budget amounts are zero.

     MUN-74951        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   SACS Combination Codes                 glcachek                                           The program no longer experiences errors when
                                                                                                                                                           you click the Validate button.
     MUN-72195        3       Financials - GL - General Ledger   SACS Extract                           glcaexpt                                           The program can save the export file to your
                                                                                                                                                           computer, in addition to saving the file to the
                                                                                                                                                           server.
     MUN-75101        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Segment Translations                   glsegcrf                                           The program no longer experiences an invalid
                                                                                                                                                           transaction error.
     MUN-69024        1       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Trip Tracker                           glwsvttt                                           The program can now successfully complete
                                                                                                                                                           external trips when the General Ledger setting for
                                                                                                                                                           general billing invoice creation is set to No.
     MUN-65902        0       Financials - GL - General Ledger   Trip Tracker                           glwsvttt                                           You can now cancel or invoice trips from prior
                                                                                                                                                           periods.




31                                                                                                d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                          (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                     Primary Program                         Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                             Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Change Needed

     MUN-68356        3       Financials - GL - General Ledger     VersaTrans TripTracker Journal          glvtttrp                                           The VersaTrans TripTracker Journal Report
                                                                   Report                                                                                     program is now available. This program allows you
                                                                                                                                                              to select, and view journals created from the Munis-
                                                                                                                                                              VersaTrans TripTracker (VTTT) integration.
                                                                                                                                                              The report allows you to select journals, group
                                                                                                                                                              them by trip number (ref 4 of the journal), and show
                                                                                                                                                              which trips show encumbrances and are
                                                                                                                                                              considered open.

     MUN-73753        2       Financials - GL - General Ledger     YTD Budget Report                       glytdbud                                           Account descriptions now display in the same
                                                                                                                                                              manner as prior versions of Munis.

     MUN-56260        3       Financials - GL - General Ledger     YTD Budget Report                       glytdbud                                           The Include Additional JE Comments report option
                                                                                                                                                              now functions properly.

     MUN-69758        1       Financials - GL - Treasury           Adjustments/Deposits Reconciliation     cfadprcn                                           Sites that use Oracle can now clear adjustments
                              Management                                                                                                                      and deposits.
     MUN-66765        1       Financials - GL - Treasury           Adjustments/Deposits Reconciliation     cfadprcn                                           The program now clears adjustments without a
                              Management                                                                                                                      designated type.
     MUN-59815        3       Financials - GL - Treasury           Adjustments/Deposits Reconciliation     cfadprcn                                           The program now contains a Clear Deposits by
                              Management                                                                                                                      Journal check box. Selecting this check box directs
                                                                                                                                                              the program to display deposits by year, period,
                                                                                                                                                              journal and line. Clearing the check box causes the
                                                                                                                                                              program to display deposits by deposit number.

     MUN-64993        3       Financials - GL - Treasury           Bank Reconciliation                     cfbnkrcn                                           The program no longer displays asterisks in place
                              Management                                                                                                                      of digits.
     MUN-63939        2       Financials - GL - Treasury           Cash Account Reconciliation Report      cfcshrcn                                           The program correctly displays checks as voided,
                              Management                                                                                                                      and includes employee numbers, void dates,
                                                                                                                                                              vendor numbers, and report options on Excel
                                                                                                                                                              outputs.

     MUN-59240        1       Financials - GL - Treasury           Cash Account Reconciliation Report      cfcshrcn                                           Vendor checks that contain withheld amounts from
                              Management                                                                                                                      prior payrolls now display the amounts by expense
                                                                                                                                                              account when using pooled cash.
                                                                                                                                                              Voided checks from the specified date range are
                                                                                                                                                              reported as cleared checks.
                                                                                                                                                              Direct deposits are considered cleared on their
                                                                                                                                                              issue date.
                                                                                                                                                              Excel exports now include all data on each line for
                                                                                                                                                              sorting purposes.
     MUN-63578        3       Financials - Purchasing              Accounts Payable Settings                                                                  The Accounts Payable Settings program no longer
                                                                                                                                                              appears twice on the Munis menu.
     MUN-60186        3       Financials - Purchasing              Bid/Contract Import, Purchase Order     rqexport, poimfile                                 Requisitions can now be imported when the
                                                                   Import, Requisition Export, Vendor                                                         requisition number is longer than 6 digits.
                                                                   Import                                                                                     You can now import contracts with a zero amount,
                                                                                                                                                              and zero quantity.
                                                                                                                                                              The file browse screen now contains a scroll bar.


     MUN-77505        1       Financials - Purchasing              Inventory Reconciliation Report         inrcnrpt                                           The program now contains the correct Project
                                                                                                                                                              labelling on the report.
     MUN-74961        1       Financials - Purchasing              Purchase Order Change Orders            pomaintn                                           The program correctly updates the change date
                                                                                                                                                              when closing, mass closing, or cancelling a
                                                                                                                                                              purchase order.
                                                                                                                                                              The program correctly updates the allocation
                                                                                                                                                              number when changing allocations on a detail line.

     MUN-68906        3       Financials - Purchasing              Purchase Order Import, Requisition      poimfile                                           Scheduled imports and exports no longer cancel if
                                                                   Export                                                                                     an import or export file is not found in the directory.


     MUN-68140        3       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Accounts Payable Module                 ap1099gp, ap1099in,                                1099 programs in the Accounts Payable module
                              Payable                                                                      ap1099ms, ap1099sl,                                now support the 2010 fiscal year.
                                                                                                           ap99impt, ap99detl, ap99summ


32                                                                                                   d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                              (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                     Primary Program                        Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Change Needed

     MUN-38365        3       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Accounts Payable Module                                                                 The Accounts Payable module now complies with
                              Payable                                                                                                                      IRS 3402(t) withholding. You must enable the
                                                                                                                                                           3402(t) withholding in the Accounts Payable
                                                                                                                                                           Settings program.
     MUN-59646        0       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   ACI Export                             apexpaci                                         When use tax vendors exist in the selection, the
                              Payable                                                                                                                      program can successfully produce exports and
                                                                                                                                                           journal entries.

     MUN-59825        1       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Automated Checks                       apchecks                                         The program calculates the correct invoice gross
                              Payable                                                                                                                      amount for format X.

     MUN-56153        3       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Check Reconciliation                   apchkrcn                                         Batch numbers can now be up to six digits in
                              Payable                                                                                                                      length.
     MUN-59995        1       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Check Reconciliation                   apchkrcn                                         The program no longer encounters an error related
                              Payable                                                                                                                      to entry of an improper org code range.
     MUN-78238        1       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Check Reconciliation                   apchkrcn                                         The USP positive pay format no longer includes
                              Payable                                                                                                                      Vendor Name 2 when a remit address is used.

     MUN-83219        1       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Invoice Change Orders                  apinvmnt                                         The program now allows maintenance in the
                              Payable                                                                                                                      current year of prior year invoices that directly
                                                                                                                                                           liquidated contracts.
     MUN-63710        2       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Invoice Entry                          apinvent, inbarcod                               Barcode labels for invoices and inventory items
                              Payable                                                                                                                      now print darker, and the entire label feeds out of
                                                                                                                                                           the printer for easier removal.
     MUN-65194        2       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Invoice Entry                          apinvent                                         Clicking View Invoice from the MyWork web part,
                              Payable                                                                                                                      or Workflow Messenger opens the Invoice Entry
                                                                                                                                                           program with the correct invoice displayed.

     MUN-73274        2       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Invoice Entry                          apinvent                                         If the main purchase order on an invoice
                              Payable                                                                                                                      references a contract, clicking the Add PO button
                                                                                                                                                           only displays purchase orders that are also
                                                                                                                                                           associated with that contract. If the main purchase
                                                                                                                                                           order does not reference a contract, clicking Add
                                                                                                                                                           PO only displays purchase orders that are not
                                                                                                                                                           associated with any contract.
     MUN-65040        1       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Invoice Entry                          apinvent                                         Invoice batches that contain multiple invoices with
                              Payable                                                                                                                      the same wire number now post without error.

     MUN-63439        1       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Invoice Entry                          apinvent                                         The program correctly enforces accounts payable
                              Payable                                                                                                                      permissions for accessing the org, object, and
                                                                                                                                                           project when a purchase order is liquidated.

     MUN-67961        2       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Invoice Entry                          apinvent                                         The program displays the correct page counts for
                              Payable                                                                                                                      barcode label reprints.
                                                                                                                                                           The left margin of barcode labels is now .2" larger.

     MUN-60235        1       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Invoice Entry                          apinvent                                         The program now allows you to use the Add
                              Payable                                                                                                                      Accounts feature when your site uses the long
                                                                                                                                                           account entry method.
     MUN-60551        1       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Invoice Entry                          apinvent                                         The program properly liquidates purchase orders
                              Payable                                                                                                                      that contain project accounts.
     MUN-64557        2       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Invoice Entry                          apinvent                                         Tyler Content Manager document numbers for
                              Payable                                                                                                                      invoice barcode labels can now contain up to 25
                                                                                                                                                           characters.
     MUN-72230        3       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Invoice Entry, Invoice Inquiry         apinvent                                         Invoices can now be created by the new purchase
                              Payable                                                                                                                      card processing module.
                                                                                                                                                           Invoice Entry does not allow users to modify or
                                                                                                                                                           maintain invoices created by the purchase card
                                                                                                                                                           module, but they can be deleted from the proof file.
                                                                                                                                                           Invoice Inquiry is able to display the created
                                                                                                                                                           invoices, with a payment method of P-Card
                                                                                                                                                           Transaction.

     MUN-61230        1       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts   Paid Warrant Report                    appdwarr                                         The program no longer encounters a looping error.
                              Payable


33                                                                                                  d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                         (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                      Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Change Needed

     MUN-66136        0       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts    Print Checks                          apchecks                                           The Print Checks program now updates cash
                              Payable                                                                                                                        disbursement tables, and updates invoice header
                                                                                                                                                             tables before checks are printed. These updates
                                                                                                                                                             are made as a single transaction. If an error occurs
                                                                                                                                                             during the updates, the checks are not printed.
                                                                                                                                                             The program now properly begins, rolls back, and
                                                                                                                                                             commits transactions.

     MUN-74724        1       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts    Print Checks                          apchecks                                           The program no longer creates an empty file when
                              Payable                                                                                                                        printing Student Activity checks.
     MUN-77718        1       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts    Purchase Card Import                  apimpnet                                           The program now functions properly when using
                              Payable                                                                                                                        the MSDOL file format.
     MUN-78455        1       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts    Purchase Card Import                  apimpnet                                           The Works format now functions properly.
                              Payable
     MUN-59767        1       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts    Purchase Card Import                  apimpnet                                           When using the Info America file format, the
                              Payable                                                                                                                        program now examines each imported line. If a
                                                                                                                                                             comma is found at the end of an import line, it is
                                                                                                                                                             removed. This prevents failed import processes.

     MUN-63577        1       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts    Recurring Invoices                    aprecurr                                           The program correctly applies the Liquidate by
                              Payable                                                                                                                        Account feature.
     MUN-69111        3       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts    Vendor 1099 Summary                   ap99summ                                           A new form is available in the Vendor 1099
                              Payable                                                                                                                        Summary program. This form captures CUSIP
                                                                                                                                                             numbers related to 1099-INT, Box 10.
     MUN-69066        2       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts    Vendor Import                         apvdrimp                                           Scheduled imports can now continue when an
                              Payable                                                                                                                        import file is not found.

     MUN-72216        3       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts    Vendors                               apvdrmnt                                           The General tab contains a new check box,
                              Payable                                                                                                                        Federal Withholding. This check box can be used
                                                                                                                                                             as part of a Find action, and is displayed on
                                                                                                                                                             reports.
     MUN-71662        3       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts    Vendors                               apvdrmnt                                           The Vendor 1099 screen now contains a Tyler
                              Payable                                                                                                                        Content Manager camera icon, which allows you to
                                                                                                                                                             view or maintain 1099 document types.
     MUN-70664        3       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts    Vendors                               apvdrmnt, apinvinq                                 The Vendors program now controls access to a
                              Payable                                                                                                                        vendor's 1099 and remit address information. You
                                                                                                                                                             can only update these fields if you have been
                                                                                                                                                             assigned permission to do so in the Purchasing
                                                                                                                                                             Roles program.
     MUN-71855        3       Financials - Purchasing - Accounts    Vendors                               apvdrmnt, apvendorio                               Vendors can now be noted as owned by minorities
                              Payable                                                                                                                        or women on the Misc tab.
     MUN-64382        1       Financials - Purchasing - Employee    Expense Claims                        eefuncts, eeclmmst                                 The Expense Claims program no longer examines
                              Expense                                                                                                                        an employee's payroll department when applying
                                                                                                                                                             departmental access permissions.

     MUN-63160        2       Financials - Purchasing - Employee    Expense Conversion                    eeconvrt                                           The program now automatically completes the
                              Expense                                                                                                                        values of the wire transfer, separate checks, and
                                                                                                                                                             included documentation options based on the
                                                                                                                                                             vendor record.
     MUN-70051        2       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Enter Inventory Counts                inactual, inadjust                                 The program correctly updates FIFO records after
                                                                                                                                                             an adjustment is made.
     MUN-73776        2       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Enter Inventory Counts                inactual, inadjust                                 The program now posts negative adjustments to
                                                                                                                                                             inventory accounts using the calculated FIFO unit
                                                                                                                                                             cost.
     MUN-61040        2       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Enter Inventory Counts, Inventory     initmmst, inadjust, inactual                       Inventory programs that adjust the quantity on
                                                                    Items                                                                                    hand for an item now record a posting date and
                                                                                                                                                             posting time.
                                                                                                                                                             The Inventory Items program now displays a
                                                                                                                                                             transaction history for a selected location by post
                                                                                                                                                             date, and post time. This allows for more accurate
                                                                                                                                                             representations of the quantity on hand of an item.

     MUN-60436        1       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Enter Inventory Counts, Transaction   intrhist, inactual, inadjust                       The programs no longer encounter errors when
                                                                    Entry/History File                                                                       adjusting inventory from zero quantity-on-hand for
                                                                                                                                                             sites that use the average cost across locations
                                                                                                                                                             inventory method.

34                                                                                                 d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                            (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                      Primary Program                         Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Change Needed

     MUN-65110        2       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Inventory Count Worksheets              ininvcnt                                           The program now uses the issuing unit of measure,
                                                                                                                                                               instead of the purchase unit of measure.

     MUN-63099        3       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Inventory Items                         initmmst                                           The program correctly displays returns as part of
                                                                                                                                                               an item's history records.
     MUN-69815        3       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Inventory Items, Requisition Entry      initmmst, intrhist, inticket                       The Inventory Items program now contains an
                                                                                                                                                               Update the General ledger check box. This check
                                                                                                                                                               box functions in the same manner as the one
                                                                                                                                                               presented in Inventory Settings, but on a per-item
                                                                                                                                                               basis. The check box in Inventory Settings must be
                                                                                                                                                               selected in order to view the check box in Inventory
                                                                                                                                                               Items.
                                                                                                                                                               When entering requisitions for inventory items that
                                                                                                                                                               have been set to not update the general ledger,
                                                                                                                                                               unless the item is for a purchase, and not a pick
                                                                                                                                                               ticket.
     MUN-4413         3       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Inventory List by Location              ininvlst                                           The report can now display amounts of up to
                                                                                                                                                               $9,999,999.9999 in the Value on Hand column.
     MUN-16263        1       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Inventory Reconciliation Report         inrcnrpt                                           The Inventory Reconciliation Report is now
                                                                                                                                                               available. This program assists with reconciling
                                                                                                                                                               inventory.
     MUN-65115        2       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Inventory Transactions                  intrhist                                           The program correctly inserts the default central
                                                                                                                                                               depository fund from the Inventory Settings
                                                                                                                                                               program when issuing items.
     MUN-69594        2       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Inventory Transactions                  intrhist                                           You can now properly adjust inventory with
                                                                                                                                                               negative quantities.
     MUN-70261        1       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Item Reorder Report                     inminord                                           Purchase orders now contain the correct vendor
                                                                                                                                                               item number.

     MUN-58722        2       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Item Reorder Report                     inminord                                           The program now places the MRP and ON
                                                                                                                                                               ORDER fields in the correct order.
     MUN-65215        1       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Pick Ticket                             inticket                                           Pick tickets created from current year requisitions
                                                                                                                                                               now post to the correct default year and period.

     MUN-58991        0       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Pick Ticket                             inticket                                           Pick tickets created from next year requisitions
                                                                                                                                                               now post to the next year when issued.


     MUN-61291        1       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Pick Ticket                             inticket                                           The field help button for the Full Account field
                                                                                                                                                               functions properly.

     MUN-38801        2       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Pick Ticket                             inticket                                           The program now includes a column for the item
                                                                                                                                                               description.
     MUN-65626        1       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Pick Ticket                             inticket                                           The Ship All function now completes in less time.

     MUN-56133        2       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Pick Tickets                            inticket                                           The program now enters valid default
                                                                                                                                                               org/object/project combinations.
     MUN-60569        1       Financials - Purchasing - Inventory   Purchase Order Change Orders            pomaintn, inminord                                 The Purchase Order Change Orders program no
                                                                                                                                                               longer experiences an error when run via the Item
                                                                                                                                                               Reorder Report.
     MUN-65593        1       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase    Invoice inquiry, Purchase Order         poinqury, apvdrmnt, apinvinq                       You can no longer add, update, or delete
                              Orders                                Inquiry, Vendor Inquiry                                                                    attachments in the Invoice inquiry, Purchase Order
                                                                                                                                                               Inquiry, and Vendor Inquiry programs.
     MUN-59428        1       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase    Print Purchase Orders                   poprints                                           The XML export files created by the Print Purchase
                              Orders                                                                                                                           Orders program now indicate whether a purchase
                                                                                                                                                               order has attachments. A value of N indicates no
                                                                                                                                                               attachments, and a value of Y indicates
                                                                                                                                                               attachments.
                                                                                                                                                               If your site chooses to load this code, you must
                                                                                                                                                               work with Tyler Forms in order to set up the new
                                                                                                                                                               tag to print on your forms.
     MUN-64543        2       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase    Print Purchase Orders                   poprints                                           When the PO Mailing field on a purchase order is
                              Orders                                                                                                                           set to zero, the XML file generated by the program
                                                                                                                                                               now includes information from the vendor record.
                                                                                                                                                               The fax number is drawn from the vendor's contact
                                                                                                                                                               information.

35                                                                                                    d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                           (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                     Primary Program                    Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Change Needed

     MUN-63023        3       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase   Print Purchase Orders, Purchase    poprints, pomaintn, pousetax                        Purchase orders now record the date upon which a
                              Orders                               Order Change Orders                                                                    detail line is updated. The Purchase Order Change
                                                                                                                                                          Orders program uses this date to determine and
                                                                                                                                                          display changes to purchase orders.
                                                                                                                                                          The Print Purchase Orders program now indicates
                                                                                                                                                          whether a purchase order has been changed, or
                                                                                                                                                          not when printing.

     MUN-63496        1       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase   Purchase Order Change Orders       pomaintn                                            Posting a change order no longer overwrites the
                              Orders                                                                                                                      purchase order's entry date, fiscal period, or
                                                                                                                                                          general ledger effective date.

     MUN-63058        2       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase   Purchase Order Change Orders       pomaintn                                            The Approvers button now functions properly.
                              Orders
     MUN-64306        1       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase   Purchase Order Change Orders       pomaintn                                            The Cancel PO button now functions properly.
                              Orders
     MUN-69507        0       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase   Purchase Order Change Orders       pomaintn                                            The program no longer generates an error when
                              Orders                                                                                                                      you attempt to save additional changes after an
                                                                                                                                                          account has been changed on the purchase order.


     MUN-80106        1       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase   Purchase Order Change Orders       pomaintn                                            The program no longer generates invalid cursor
                              Orders                                                                                                                      errors when performing a Find action.
     MUN-77278        1       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase   Purchase Order Change Orders       pomaintn                                            The program no longer updates the original
                              Orders                                                                                                                      purchase order when entering a change order. The
                                                                                                                                                          original purchase order is not altered until the
                                                                                                                                                          change order has been posted.
     MUN-78775        1       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase   Purchase Order Change Orders       pomaintn                                            The program now allows the addition of new
                              Orders                                                                                                                      account sequence lines when your site uses the
                                                                                                                                                          long account entry method.
     MUN-61729        3       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase   Purchase Order Change Orders,      poentpst, pomaintn, poprints,                       The Purchase Order Entry, and Purchase Order
                              Orders                               Purchase Order Entry, Purchase     podetailio                                          Change Orders programs now contain PO Delivery
                                                                   Order Roles                                                                            Methods fields.
                                                                                                                                                          In Purchase Order Entry, these fields draw their
                                                                                                                                                          default values from the vendor record.
                                                                                                                                                          In Purchase Order Change Orders, these fields
                                                                                                                                                          draw their default values from the purchase order.
                                                                                                                                                          Purchase Order Roles contains a new permission,
                                                                                                                                                          Override PO Delivery Method Defaults. This
                                                                                                                                                          permission controls whether a user can alter the
                                                                                                                                                          values of the PO Delivery Method fields.


     MUN-50110        3       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase   Purchase Order Change Orders,      poinqury, pomaintn                                  The Mass Close PO option is now available in the
                              Orders                               Purchase Order Inquiry                                                                 Purchase Order Change Orders program. This
                                                                                                                                                          option closes all purchase orders in your current
                                                                                                                                                          find set that have a zero open amount, and no
                                                                                                                                                          pending change orders. Once the process is
                                                                                                                                                          complete, the program displays a message stating
                                                                                                                                                          how many purchase orders were closed.
                                                                                                                                                          The Purchase Order Change Orders program now
                                                                                                                                                          allows you to search based on the purchase
                                                                                                                                                          order's open amount. This change also appears in
                                                                                                                                                          the Purchase Order Inquiry program.


     MUN-75253        1       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase   Purchase Order Entry               pousetax                                            Processing of use tax lines no longer enters a date
                              Orders                                                                                                                      in the Change Date field.
     MUN-62891        1       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase   Purchase Order Entry               poentpst                                            The field help for contract line items now enters the
                              Orders                                                                                                                      correct default location.

     MUN-68309        1       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase   Purchase Order Maintenance         pomaintn                                            The Change Liquidate option is now available
                              Orders                                                                                                                      when the purchase order is associated with a
                                                                                                                                                          contract that has no remaining unrelieved balance.
                                                                                                                                                          The change must not exceed the liquidated -
                                                                                                                                                          expended amount.

36                                                                                              d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                             (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                       Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Change Needed

     MUN-66740        1       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase     Purchase Order Maintenance            pomaintn                                            You can now successfully complete next year
                              Orders                                                                                                                           maintenance on a next year purchase order that is
                                                                                                                                                               associated with a next year contract.

     MUN-67106        1       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase     Purchase Order Maintenance            pomaintn, poentpst                                  You can now use the Change Liquidate option in
                              Orders                                                                                                                           Purchase Order Maintenance when the purchase
                                                                                                                                                               order is associated with a contract that has no
                                                                                                                                                               remaining balance. The changed liquidation must
                                                                                                                                                               not exceed the revised amount, minus the
                                                                                                                                                               expended amount.
     MUN-64094        3       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase     Purchase Order Miscellaneous Codes                                                        The Purchase Order Miscellaneous Codes
                              Orders                                                                                                                           program is no longer misspelled on the Munis
                                                                                                                                                               menu.
     MUN-61716        3       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase     Purchase Order Receiving              porecmnt                                            The program now restricts the usage of the Select
                              Orders                                                                                                                           All option in Quick Receipt. Users must now be
                                                                                                                                                               assigned permissions to use the Select All option.
                                                                                                                                                               If permissions are not assigned, the option does
                                                                                                                                                               not appear in the sidebar.

     MUN-61429        1       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase     Purchase Orders                       pomaintn                                            The program no longer generates errors when you
                              Orders                                                                                                                           attempt to post change orders.
     MUN-60416        1       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase     Purchase Orders by GL Account         poglacct                                            The program no longer makes carry forward
                              Orders                                                                                                                           budget amendments when purchase orders
                                                                                                                                                               against multi-year type 1 accounts are cancelled
                                                                                                                                                               using the Cancel by GL option in the Purchase
                                                                                                                                                               Order Maintenance program.
     MUN-72716        1       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase     Purchase Orders by GL Account         poglsegs                                            The program opens properly in the Informix
                              Orders                                                                                                                           environment.
     MUN-65870        2       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase     Purchasing Module                     poprints, poentpst, pomaintn,                       The Purchasing module now examines whether
                              Orders                                                                       poinqury                                            your site uses the Project Accounting module
                                                                                                                                                               before performing other actions that may cause
                                                                                                                                                               errors. This change speeds up reporting and
                                                                                                                                                               printing processes.
     MUN-60195        3       Financials - Purchasing - Purchase     Vendors                               apvdrmnt, apinvinq                                  The program now saves browse filters when
                              Orders                                                                                                                           selecting a record from Invoice Inquiry.

     MUN-61927        1       Financials - Purchasing - Requisitions Contract Entry, Requisition Entry     rqentpst, cmentpst                                  When using project accounts, the Requisition
                                                                                                                                                               Entry, and Contract Entry programs now verify the
                                                                                                                                                               project account status prior to allowing its use.

     MUN-81607        1       Financials - Purchasing - Requisitions Requisition Conversion                rqconvrt                                            The program no longer displays requisitions for
                                                                                                                                                               departments outside of a user's permission range.

     MUN-61584        1       Financials - Purchasing - Requisitions Requisition Conversion                rqcnvlnk                                            When converting a requisition to a purchase order,
                                                                                                                                                               if no buyer is entered for the requisition, the user
                                                                                                                                                               performing the conversion is now entered as the
                                                                                                                                                               buyer on the purchase order. If a buyer is entered
                                                                                                                                                               on the requisition, the purchase order retains the
                                                                                                                                                               same buyer.
     MUN-63796        1       Financials - Purchasing - Requisitions Requisition Conversion, Requisition   rqentpst, rqconvrt                                  The Requisition Conversion, and Requisition Entry
                                                                     Entry                                                                                     programs only display the Convert To option if your
                                                                                                                                                               site is using the Contract Management module.
                                                                                                                                                               If your site is not using the Contract Management
                                                                                                                                                               module, conversion of a requisition can only be to
                                                                                                                                                               a purchase order.

     MUN-69497        2       Financials - Purchasing - Requisitions Requisition Entry                     rqentpst                                            Custom requisition forms no longer allow users to
                                                                                                                                                               bypass emergency requisition creation
                                                                                                                                                               permissions.
     MUN-62465        2       Financials - Purchasing - Requisitions Requisition Entry                     rqentpst                                            The program displays the full delimited general
                                                                                                                                                               ledger account on the main screen, and on the
                                                                                                                                                               requisition report.
     MUN-69358        2       Financials - Purchasing - Requisitions Requisition Entry                     rqentpst                                            The program enters the correct default period for
                                                                                                                                                               next year requisitions made against next year
                                                                                                                                                               contracts.


37                                                                                                  d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                             (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                       Primary Program                        Affected Program(s)       Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Change Needed

     MUN-63617        2       Financials - Purchasing - Requisitions Requisition Entry                      rqentpst                                      The program no longer reverts to the Main tab
                                                                                                                                                          when you click the Update button while displaying
                                                                                                                                                          another tab.

     MUN-77766        1       Financials - Purchasing - Requisitions Requisition Entry                      rqentpst                                      The program now allows you to reactivate a
                                                                                                                                                          rejected requisition when the associated general
                                                                                                                                                          ledger account is over budget.

     MUN-70686        3       Financials - Purchasing - Requisitions Requisition Entry                      rqentpst                                      The program now allows you to select whether to
                                                                                                                                                          include the purchase order delivery method on the
                                                                                                                                                          requisition.
     MUN-64251        2       Financials - Purchasing - Requisitions Requisition Entry                      rqentpst                                      The program now displays the main tab, and
                                                                                                                                                          places the cursor in the correct field when you
                                                                                                                                                          attempt to create a new requisition after updating
                                                                                                                                                          another record.
     MUN-62533        2       Financials - Purchasing - Requisitions Requisition Entry                      rqentpst                                      The program now exports account information to
                                                                                                                                                          Excel without errors for both the GL Allocations,
                                                                                                                                                          and GL Summary options.
     MUN-69031        2       Financials - Purchasing - Requisitions Requisition Export                     rqexport                                      The program properly sets the status of exported
                                                                                                                                                          requisitions to 9, to avoid duplicate exports of the
                                                                                                                                                          same requisition record.
     MUN-60407        1       Financials - Purchasing - Requisitions Requisition Import                     rqwsimpt                                      When your site is holding the current year open,
                                                                                                                                                          and the Create NY REQs/POs option is active,
                                                                                                                                                          requisitions imported from Mercury Commerce
                                                                                                                                                          now abide by this permission. Current year
                                                                                                                                                          requisitions from Mercury Commerce are imported
                                                                                                                                                          and created as next year requisitions in Munis.

     MUN-72253        2       Munis Centrals                         Attach                                                                               You are able to open attachments that contain an
                                                                                                                                                          apostrophe or an ampersand in the file name from
                                                                                                                                                          Munis Central Programs.
     MUN-72414        3       Munis Centrals                         Budget Inquiry                         glwsbinq                                      If you have not saved the segment order prior to
                                                                                                                                                          accessing this program, the program returns only
                                                                                                                                                          the first three segments.
     MUN-72190        3       Munis Centrals                         Employee Central                       prwseded                                      For employee deductions, the program only returns
                                                                                                                                                          deductions with an end date greater than the
                                                                                                                                                          current date that have a status of active.

     MUN-72184        2       Munis Centrals                         Employee Pay (Web services)            prwsepay                                      The Compensation panel correctly displays all
                                                                                                                                                          employee pay records according to Org and
                                                                                                                                                          Location restrictions.
     MUN-64477        2       Munis Centrals                         Expenditure Central                    Expenditure Central                           Expenditure Central now abides by Accounts
                                                                                                                                                          Payable and Purchasing user permission sets.
     MUN-71953        3       Munis Centrals                         Position Control Central                                                             The Position Control Central program
                                                                                                                                                          accommodates changes to the Maximum
                                                                                                                                                          Employees value, which now includes decimal
                                                                                                                                                          amounts.
     MUN-72627        3       Munis Centrals                         Tyler Dashboard - Certifications Web                                                 If you have multiple certification records and you
                                                                     Part                                                                                 select the Certifications Web part, the program
                                                                                                                                                          displays a browse screen that displays a list of all
                                                                                                                                                          the records.




38                                                                                                 d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                         (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module   Primary Program                     Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                Change Needed

     MUN-70907        3       Munis Centrals     W-2 Wizard                          prwsw2fn                                            The following changes were made to the W-2
                                                                                                                                         Wizard Central program.
                                                                                                                                         6b. Print Options:
                                                                                                                                         The Print W-3 Totals check box is available. This
                                                                                                                                         check box, if selected, directs the program to print
                                                                                                                                         the Form W-3 Totals page. If this check box is not
                                                                                                                                         selected, the programs do not print this page. The
                                                                                                                                         default value for this check box is not selected.
                                                                                                                                         7a. Employer Info:
                                                                                                                                         The State Control box accommodates up to 15
                                                                                                                                         characters.
                                                                                                                                         7d. Electronic File Options:
                                                                                                                                         The File Submit Date box is available. This box
                                                                                                                                         contains the date that the online file is to be
                                                                                                                                         submitted. The default value is the current date,
                                                                                                                                         but you can change this. Note: This date box is
                                                                                                                                         specific to Maryland organizations.
                                                                                                                                         For a resubmittal, the label reads "If yes, please
                                                                                                                                         provide a WFID."
                                                                                                                                         7e. Employees to Include in Electronic File:
                                                                                                                                         The LIT Reference box is available. This box
                                                                                                                                         contains the local income tax (LIT) reference code
                                                                                                                                         as entered in Local (LIT) Codes program. The
                                                                                                                                         program uses this value to process all local
                                                                                                                                         income tax codes, even if they are not in
                                                                                                                                         consecutive order, allowing them to be processed
                                                                                                                                         in one file.

     MUN-68756        3       Munis Centrals     W-2 Wizard                          prwsw2fn                                            The program is current with 2010 year-end
                                                                                                                                         processing, including the updated FICA Gross
                                                                                                                                         Limit of $106,800.
                                                                                                                                         The program is consistent with the file naming
                                                                                                                                         conventions for all other Munis programs.
                                                                                                                                         The help symbol replaces the Explain This buttons.
                                                                                                                                         On the 1a. Wizard Home screen:
                                                                                                                                         The Tyler Forms W-2 Forms Info link is up-to-date
                                                                                                                                         (http://www.tylertech.com/client-support/tyler-
                                                                                                                                         federal-tax-forms/munis-federal-tax-forms ).
                                                                                                                                         The SSA W-2 Reporting Info button links to the
                                                                                                                                         Social Security Online/Employer W-2 Filing
                                                                                                                                         Instructions & Information Web page.
                                                                                                                                         The SSA Guide to W-2 Wage Reports button is
                                                                                                                                         removed as it was redundant to the information
                                                                                                                                         linked to the SSA W-2 Reporting Info button.
                                                                                                                                         On the 3a. Dependent Care/Election
                                                                                                                                         Workers/Cafeteria Plan screen:
                                                                                                                                         The help content for the Do You Need to Report
                                                                                                                                         Health Savings Account Amounts from a Cafeteria
                                                                                                                                         Plan question is available.
                                                                                                                                         On the 3b. Match FIT/CA SDI screen:
                                                                                                                                         The Do You Need to Report California State
                                                                                                                                         Disability Insurance question is available on this
                                                                                                                                         screen (formerly on screen 3c). The help button
                                                                                                                                         and content is available for this question.
                                                                                                                                         On the 3c. Box 14/Retirement screen:
                                                                                                                                         The Do You Need to Flag W-2 Records with a
                                                                                                                                         Retirement Plan Based on Active Deductions
                                                                                                                                         question is available. If you select yes, there are
                                                                                                                                         three ranges of deduction codes in which to
                                                                                                                                         identify the retirement-specific codes used by your
     MUN-52221        3       Payroll            Pending Applicants, Job Openings,   atappreq, atreqmnt, pmcmcase,                       organization. Status list is available when Munis
                                                                                                                                         The Workflow
                                                 Case Management, Employee           pmempeva, pmposctl,                                 Workflow is enabled. This list indicates the current
                                                 Evaluations, Position Control,      pmtrnemp, prbusctl                                  workflow status of the record and is available as
                                                 Employee Training, LA Bus Mileage                                                       search criteria.
                                                 Maintenance                                                                             The On Hold option is available for the Workflow
                                                                                                                                         Status list.

39                                                                           d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                              (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module               Primary Program                        Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                            Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                Change Needed

     MUN-67560        2       Payroll - Applicant Tracking   Applicant Master                       atappmst                                           If you delete a single reference, the program does
                                                                                                                                                       not delete all reference questionnaires for the
                                                                                                                                                       applicant.
     MUN-67204        2       Payroll - Applicant Tracking   Applicant Master                       atappmst                                           The program does not accept a final dash in the
                                                                                                                                                       Zip Code box of the work history and reference
                                                                                                                                                       addresses if you do not enter the 4-digit suffix
                                                                                                                                                       code.
     MUN-69857        2       Payroll - Applicant Tracking   Applicant Master                       atappmnt                                           When automatically assigning a default Social
                                                                                                                                                       Security number, the program correctly assigns the
                                                                                                                                                       next available number.
     MUN-62796        2       Payroll - Applicant Tracking   Applicant Master (Advanced Applicant atappmst                                             The Tests and Conditions option does not verify
                                                             Tracking)                                                                                 Social Security numbers, which prevents errors
                                                                                                                                                       when updating Test and Conditions records.

     MUN-63509        3       Payroll - Applicant Tracking   Applicant Master (Advanced Applicant atappmst, atcustyp                                   On the main screen of the Applicant Master
                                                             Tracking), Custom Datatypes                                                               program, the XML Import option is available. This
                                                                                                                                                       option allows you to import applicant data using an
                                                                                                                                                       XML format.
                                                                                                                                                       On the Applicant References screen of the
                                                                                                                                                       Applicant Master program, the Text option allows
                                                                                                                                                       you to add comments or reference text to the
                                                                                                                                                       records.
                                                                                                                                                       In the Custom Datatypes program, the Reference
                                                                                                                                                       box allows for XML import direct lookup. Since
                                                                                                                                                       many fields within the import structure do not
                                                                                                                                                       directly translate to Munis Applicant Master fields,
                                                                                                                                                       the program attempts to match the data to
                                                                                                                                                       available custom data types by matching the XML
                                                                                                                                                       field tag name to value of the Reference box. For
                                                                                                                                                       matches found, the program saves the data under
                                                                                                                                                       the custom data type and for when matches are
                                                                                                                                                       not found, the fields are not imported.


     MUN-57426        3       Payroll - Applicant Tracking   Applicant Processing Settings,         atwsappl, atparams                                 The Position check box is available on the MSS
                                                             Applications (Web services)                                                               Field Access tab. If selected, this check box
                                                                                                                                                       causes a job opening's position number and
                                                                                                                                                       description to display in job applications.
     MUN-57427        3       Payroll - Applicant Tracking   Applicant Profile (Web services)       atwsappl                                           The Applicant Profile Web page includes the Last
                                                                                                                                                       Update Date field, which indicates the date the
                                                                                                                                                       profile was most recently updated.
     MUN-67484        2       Payroll - Applicant Tracking   Applicant Profile (Web services)       atwsappl                                           When customer check boxes are used as hidden
                                                                                                                                                       fields, default values complete correctly from the
                                                                                                                                                       data provided within the application.
     MUN-72976        3       Payroll - Applicant Tracking   Applicant Scoring                      atreqwgt, atwgtlnk, pmwsappl                       The Tests/Conditions tab allows you to rank
                                                                                                                                                       applicants based on test/condition data.
     MUN-73631        2       Payroll - Applicant Tracking   Job Openings                           atreqmnt                                           The program correctly sets the value of the
                                                                                                                                                       Salary/Rate ranges according to the values
                                                                                                                                                       entered in the Grade and Step boxes.
     MUN-72151        3       Payroll - Applicant Tracking   Pending Applicants                     atappreq                                           The program restricts requisitions according to the
                                                                                                                                                       location restrictions defined for the user in the
                                                                                                                                                       System Administration HR/Management Roles
                                                                                                                                                       program.
     MUN-65646        3       Payroll - Applicant Tracking   Self Service Applications              atmolapp                                           Default values for Skill Types and Certification
                                                                                                                                                       Types are correct for applications when
                                                                                                                                                       organizations define Skill Codes and Certification
                                                                                                                                                       Codes, respectively. However, modifications to
                                                                                                                                                       Skills Codes and Certification Codes that result in
                                                                                                                                                       type codes being removed or added require that all
                                                                                                                                                       applications that use those skill and/or certification
                                                                                                                                                       types be recompiled to properly pick up the
                                                                                                                                                       changes.




40                                                                                            d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                             (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module               Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)              Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                               Change Needed

     MUN-70964        3       Payroll - Applicant Tracking   Self Service Applications             atmolapp                                             When you set the SSN value for the Field box to
                                                                                                                                                        hidden on the Modules screen, the application
                                                                                                                                                        contains a blank label for this field. This allows
                                                                                                                                                        your organization to collect applicant information
                                                                                                                                                        without requiring Social Security numbers.

     MUN-63531        1       Payroll - Applicant Tracking   Self Service Applications, Custom     atmolapp, atparams, atcustyp                         Custom data types do not require payroll field
                                                             Datatypes                                                                                  values; data types function correctly in the Self
                                                                                                                                                        Service Application program.

     MUN-67669        2       Payroll - Applicant Tracking   Self Service Applications, Skills     atmolapp, pmskldef                                   For application modules certifications, skills, work
                                                             Codes                                                                                      history, references, and education, key fields that
                                                                                                                                                        are required in programs must be included on any
                                                                                                                                                        module for each type. For example, the Employee
                                                                                                                                                        Certifications program requires values for the
                                                                                                                                                        Type, Area, and Effective Date fields; as a result,
                                                                                                                                                        they are required in the module as well. There are
                                                                                                                                                        no required exclusions; therefore, when a module
                                                                                                                                                        is required, the key fields are also required. The
                                                                                                                                                        Certification setup does not require a level code.


     MUN-67271        2       Payroll - Payroll              Accrual Fix Utility                   praccfix                                             The program correctly displays errors without
                                                                                                                                                        requiring you to create an error report.
     MUN-73742        2       Payroll - Payroll              Accrual Import                        praccimp                                             The utility correctly manages records that are
                                                                                                                                                        incorrectly formatted or have missing values.
     MUN-60246        3       Payroll - Payroll              Accrual Tables, Attendance Bonus      pracctbl, prattpay, prattbonio                       On the Attendance Bonus tab in the Accrual Tables
                                                             Pay                                                                                        program, the Process list includes the Period by
                                                                                                                                                        Days and Yearly options. Each of these processing
                                                                                                                                                        types uses a period of time for which an employee
                                                                                                                                                        has had no excluded accrual days taken.
                                                                                                                                                        Additionally, the Attendance Bonus Pay program
                                                                                                                                                        tracks the number of days in addition to weekdays
                                                                                                                                                        that are valid work days. Therefore, you can set up
                                                                                                                                                        a period of days (for example, a 40-day period) for
                                                                                                                                                        days Monday through Friday. When processing,
                                                                                                                                                        the program only counts weekdays, therefore the
                                                                                                                                                        40-day period may include up to 54 calendar days.

                                                                                                                                                        In the Attendance Bonus Pay program, when the
                                                                                                                                                        Period by Days or Year process option is selected
                                                                                                                                                        in the Accrual Tables program, the Bonus Date in
                                                                                                                                                        the Attendance Bonus Pay program is determined
                                                                                                                                                        by the period of the bonus. For example, for a 40-
                                                                                                                                                        work day period, the bonus is applied only when
                                                                                                                                                        the employee has a 40-work day period free of
                                                                                                                                                        accrual usages from either the most recent bonus
                                                                                                                                                        or the most recent accrual usage. The bonus date
                                                                                                                                                        is the 40th day, and not the defined bonus date. In
                                                                                                                                                        this way, it is possible for an employee to achieve
                                                                                                                                                        a bonus within the period even though he or she
                                                                                                                                                        may have an accrual usage within the period, but
                                                                                                                                                        after the defined bonus period.

     MUN-64778        2       Payroll - Payroll              Accrual Update                        praccupd                                             The Update Accrual Date check box is relabeled
                                                                                                                                                        Change Year on Accrual Date in Employee
                                                                                                                                                        Accruals and the description reads: "If checked,
                                                                                                                                                        the year of the accrual date of the employee
                                                                                                                                                        accruals records will be updated to the year of the
                                                                                                                                                        effective date." The proof report includes the New
                                                                                                                                                        Accrual Date column, which displays the updated
                                                                                                                                                        accrual date.
     MUN-60702        2       Payroll - Payroll              Accumulators Report                   pracmrpt                                             When the Hide SSN check box is selected on the
                                                                                                                                                        Report Options screen, the report does not display
                                                                                                                                                        the Social Security number when you select 6-
                                                                                                                                                        Group/Loc/Name as the sort option.

41                                                                                           d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                             (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module    Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                    Change Needed

     MUN-72539        1       Payroll - Payroll   Actions Entry                         pmactpen                                            If you add, update, or delete an add-to-base pay
                                                                                                                                            type, the program correctly recalculates pays
                                                                                                                                            during the posting process.
     MUN-64105        1       Payroll - Payroll   Actions Inquiry, Employee Drivers'    pmactinq, pmempdrl, prbybudr,                       The programs correctly apply Social Security
                                                  Licenses, Payroll Report by Budget,   prempinq                                            number (SSN) permissions to files exported to
                                                  Employee Inquiry                                                                          Microsoft Excel.

     MUN-61583        2       Payroll - Payroll   Advice Register and Export            pradvreg                                            The program correctly includes any deduction
                                                                                                                                            refunds when sorting records for advice register
                                                                                                                                            printing.
     MUN-68098        2       Payroll - Payroll   Applicant Master (Advanced Applicant atappmst                                             The Merge process does not cause an error when
                                                  Tracking)                                                                                 the same education record exists for the applicant
                                                                                                                                            and employee.

     MUN-70705        3       Payroll - Payroll   Applicant Master, Employee Fixed    atappmst, atappmnt, prempfas,                         The Mail Merge process accesses the correct
                                                  Assets and Inventory, Employee      prempcer, prdepend                                    template in each program.
                                                  Certifications, Employee Dependents

     MUN-65808        3       Payroll - Payroll   Attendance Bonus Pay                  prattpay                                            The Period By Days and Yearly process types use
                                                                                                                                            the To date rather than the From date for
                                                                                                                                            processing.
     MUN-64440        3       Payroll - Payroll   Calculate Pays (link routine),      prpayclc, prpaysim, prwsnsim,                         A simulated payroll uses the same cycle as the
                                                  Employee Net Pay Simulator, Net Pay premppay                                              current payroll. The Employee Net Pay Simulator
                                                  Simulator (Web services), Employee                                                        displays the cycle for the current payroll and the
                                                  Job/Salary                                                                                simulated payroll.
                                                                                                                                            The Change Cycle option is available. Use this
                                                                                                                                            option to change the cycle. This causes the
                                                                                                                                            program to find a previously existing payroll for the
                                                                                                                                            user-defined cycle. The program then uses the
                                                                                                                                            same cycle when creating the simulated payroll.
                                                                                                                                            The Net Pay Simulator (Web services) program is
                                                                                                                                            compatible with these changes.
                                                                                                                                            In Employee Job/Salary, the Net to Gross option
                                                                                                                                            allows you to define the cycle when you are
                                                                                                                                            calculating the gross amount to arrive at a net
                                                                                                                                            bonus pay.

     MUN-59576        3       Payroll - Payroll   Chesapeake Payroll Synchronization    glsyncmt, prmaster, prempinq,   Chesapeake, VA      The Chesapeake Payroll Synchronization
                                                  Maintenance, Employee Master,         prempmas                                            Maintenance program completes the Org values
                                                  Employee Inquiry, Condensed                                                               for employee records in Employee Master with the
                                                  Employee Master                                                                           value of the Employee's Supervisor's Position. The
                                                                                                                                            Employee Master, Employee Inquiry, and
                                                                                                                                            Condensed Employee Master programs display
                                                                                                                                            this value. When you create a report from
                                                                                                                                            Employee Master, Employee Inquiry, or
                                                                                                                                            Condensed Employee Master, the Sort Option
                                                                                                                                            methods include Supervisor Position in place of
                                                                                                                                            Org.


     MUN-59688        2       Payroll - Payroll   Condensed Employee Master             prempmas, pmgivemp                                  When you complete a new hire action in the Action
                                                                                                                                            Entry program, the Condensed Employee Master
                                                                                                                                            program processes without error.

     MUN-64648        2       Payroll - Payroll   Days Worked by Job                    prjobday                                            When you complete the year-end process, the
                                                                                                                                            program does not produce the Subtable Calc Code
                                                                                                                                            error.
     MUN-64909        2       Payroll - Payroll   Default Pay/Deduction Types, Job      prdpddfm, prjobcls, pmposctl                        When you select the Types option in the Job Class
                                                  Class Master, Position Control                                                            Master or Position Control program, the Pay list on
                                                                                                                                            the Default Pay/Deduction Types screen does not
                                                                                                                                            include category 1 pays as an option.

     MUN-27216        2       Payroll - Payroll   Detail Check History Report           prhisrpt                                            If your organization uses the Full Account entry
                                                                                                                                            mode for general ledger accounts, the program
                                                                                                                                            only displays an account for deductions; it does not
                                                                                                                                            display an account for employee pays.

42                                                                              d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                               (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module    Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                   Change Needed

     MUN-72080        2       Payroll - Payroll   Detail Check History Report           prhisrpt                                            The format for the grand total for hours prints
                                                                                                                                            values up to 9,999,999.99.
     MUN-61505        2       Payroll - Payroll   Detail Distribution Report            prdistrp                                            The Column Choice option is only available
                                                                                                                                            according to the value of the Sort Option list. For
                                                                                                                                            those options that do not include general ledger
                                                                                                                                            details, the option is not accessible.
     MUN-64190        1       Payroll - Payroll   Disability and Unemployment Report    prdunrpt                        Ohio                OH ICESA Unemployment Report taxable wages
                                                                                                                                            are correct.
     MUN-60028        2       Payroll - Payroll   Earnings and Deductions Proof         prpyddpf                                            If a final proof has been identified as In Progress
                                                                                                                                            due to a network interruption and you attempt to re-
                                                                                                                                            run the final proof, the program prompts you to
                                                                                                                                            remove the lock on the proof process so that you
                                                                                                                                            can re-run it.
                                                                                                                                            When you create a final proof, the program allows
                                                                                                                                            you to click Display on the toolbar to view the
                                                                                                                                            proof; however, before you can continue
                                                                                                                                            processing the payroll, you must print, create a
                                                                                                                                            PDF file, or save the proof report.

     MUN-79604        1       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Accruals (Web services)      prwseacc                                            The data output for the service includes the job
                                                                                                                                            class (if available), job class description (if
                                                                                                                                            available), accrual type, accrual type description,
                                                                                                                                            and accrual table.
     MUN-62149        2       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Accruals (Web services)      prwseacc                                            The Employee Self-Service application does not
                                                                                                                                            allow employees to enter time-off requests for
                                                                                                                                            inactive employee accruals.

     MUN-53718        2       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Accruals Report              praccrpt                                            When you create an Earned/Used Accrual Report,
                                                                                                                                            the program correctly includes all reason types.

     MUN-45227        3       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Assignments                  prempass, prempassio,                               The program uses the effective date as part of the
                                                                                        praudlnk, pmactpen, pmactgen,                       key that uniquely identifies a record, allowing you
                                                                                        prdelmov, praudinq                                  to track the same assignment across multiple
                                                                                                                                            years for the same employee, assignment, and
                                                                                                                                            location combination.
     MUN-76933        1       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Benefits                     prempded, prcatmen, prdedmst                        The program processes without error when called
                                                                                                                                            from the Employee Master program.
     MUN-67303        2       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Benefits Eyemed and          prdedexp                                            Employee exclusions are expanded to include
                                                  UNUM Export                                                                               those employees for whom the inactive date puts
                                                                                                                                            the coverage beyond the value of the Benefit
                                                                                                                                            Threshold.

     MUN-78791        1       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Deductions                   prempded                                            When you use the View History option to view
                                                                                                                                            audit details, the program does not incorrectly
                                                                                                                                            open a new audit program when you close the
                                                                                                                                            View History screen.
     MUN-71906        2       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Dependents (Web              prwsedpn                                            The service returns the correct values when no
                                                  services)                                                                                 dependents are located.
     MUN-67479        3       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Direct Deposits (Web         prwsddep, prwshdlr, prctlfil                        A Web service that performs changes and lookups
                                                  services)                                                                                 for direct deposit data in Employee Self Service is
                                                                                                                                            available.
     MUN-79889        3       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Emergency Contacts           prempemg                                            The program works within the established payroll
                                                                                                                                            category restrictions.
     MUN-73224        2       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Import                       prempimp                                            If a start date for employee deductions is not
                                                                                                                                            included in the import, the default value is
                                                                                                                                            completed from the Deduction and Benefit Master
                                                                                                                                            program. You can change the deduction start date,
                                                                                                                                            as required, in the defined import form or comma-
                                                                                                                                            delimited import file.

     MUN-71789        2       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Import                       prempimp                                            The program does not allow records for terminated
                                                                                                                                            employees to be included during the import
                                                                                                                                            process. The error report indicates that records
                                                                                                                                            have been omitted.



43                                                                                d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                            (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module    Primary Program                    Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                Change Needed

     MUN-67868        3       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Inquiry                   prempinq                                           The program displays the position description and
                                                                                                                                        includes the description in the Microsoft Excel
                                                                                                                                        export file.

     MUN-78858        1       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Job/Salary                premppay                                           If the Position Control check box is selected in Job
                                                                                                                                        Class Master, the Employee Job/Salary program
                                                                                                                                        first checks the position control record for a
                                                                                                                                        matching risk code, and then checks the job class
                                                                                                                                        record for the matching risk code. If the two risk
                                                                                                                                        codes match, the Employee Job/Salary displays
                                                                                                                                        this code in the Risk Code box.

     MUN-64575        3       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Job/Salary                premppay                                           On the Net to Gross screen, the Pay Start Date
                                                                                                                                        and Pay End Date boxes are available. These
                                                                                                                                        boxes allow you to define the calculation for
                                                                                                                                        specific pay records in the active set. When the
                                                                                                                                        calculation is complete, the program provides the
                                                                                                                                        option for updating the employee records. If you
                                                                                                                                        leave these dates blank, the dates on the pay
                                                                                                                                        records are not affected.




     MUN-67089        1       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Job/Salary                premppay                                           When the value of the nonentry fields on the GL
                                                                                                                                        Manual Allocation screen in Employee Job/Salary
                                                                                                                                        does not total completely to the value of the
                                                                                                                                        corresponding Employee Job/Salary record, the
                                                                                                                                        program correctly validates the amounts.

     MUN-66240        3       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Job/Salary                premppay                                           When you add a record and the risk code matches
                                                                                                                                        the risk code from the Job Class Master record,
                                                                                                                                        the Employee Job/Salary program sets the risk
                                                                                                                                        code to space before inserting the record so that
                                                                                                                                        the program properly displays the risk code from
                                                                                                                                        the Job Class Master record.




     MUN-73849        3       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Job/Salary                premppay                                           When you update project account information, the
                                                                                                                                        program displays a message querying if the
                                                                                                                                        change should also be applied to the position
                                                                                                                                        record.
     MUN-59403        2       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Master                    prmaster                                           If you delete the value of the e-mail address in the
                                                                                                                                        Email box on the Address tab for an employee
                                                                                                                                        record with the Advice Delivery option of E-Email
                                                                                                                                        Only, the program displays an "E-mail required"
                                                                                                                                        message.
     MUN-67381        3       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Master                    prmaster                                           The Last Change tab correctly captures changes
                                                                                                                                        for employee master data; however, changes to
                                                                                                                                        the Address tab fields are intentionally not
                                                                                                                                        captured.
     MUN-72410        2       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Master, Vendor Update,    prwseadd, pmactpen_cpyemp,                         When information is updated in Employee Self
                                                  Employee Import, Employee Add      prempimp, prvdrupd, prmaster                       Service (ESS), employee and vendor data is
                                                  (Web services)                                                                        synchronized.

     MUN-53049        2       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Profile (Web services)    prwseadd, prwsuser                                 When an employee updates his or her address or
                                                                                                                                        e-mail address using Employee Self Service, the
                                                                                                                                        program only sends Human Resources an e-mail
                                                                                                                                        notification if a new address is added or an existing
                                                                                                                                        address is actually modified.

     MUN-60007        2       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Salary Notices, Salary    prsalnot, prsalnfy                                 The Liverpool Salary Notice process includes the
                                                  Notifications                                                                         calc code 73 factor calculation and displays
                                                                                                                                        amounts correctly.



44                                                                             d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                            (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module    Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                             Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                   Change Needed

     MUN-60614        2       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Salary Notifications         prsalnfy                                         The program distributes e-mails according to the
                                                                                                                                         settings defined on the Salary Notifications Email
                                                                                                                                         Preferences screen.
     MUN-72531        2       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Time Sheets (Web             prwsetae                                         The service checks only the live or terminated
                                                  services)                                                                              tables for the employee location code.
     MUN-76897        0       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Update                       prempupd                                         Employee earnings history is correct for allocated
                                                                                                                                         pays.
     MUN-66810        1       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Update                       prempupd                                         Escrow pays process as regular pays if the escrow
                                                                                                                                         pay type is invalid at time of payroll generation. If
                                                                                                                                         an escrow pay type is removed (thereby becoming
                                                                                                                                         invalid to any pays currently using it) during a
                                                                                                                                         payroll, the Employee Update program processes
                                                                                                                                         that pay as a non-escrow pay. Note: This may
                                                                                                                                         result in pay data on the pay itself no longer being
                                                                                                                                         correct, which may result in incorrect amounts on
                                                                                                                                         the earnings history records.


     MUN-70304        2       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Update                       prempupd                                         For organizations using Liability by Funds for
                                                                                                                                         posting deduction withholding amounts,
                                                                                                                                         expenditure and accounts payable control
                                                                                                                                         accounts are retrieved using a Financials utility
                                                                                                                                         program.
     MUN-65495        2       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Update                       prempupd                                         The Employee Update process properly adjusts
                                                                                                                                         deduction escrow balances.
     MUN-70136        1       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Update                       prempupd                                         The GL Posting option P- Employee Org and Proj
                                                                                                                                         for Benefits Only in the Payroll Control Settings file
                                                                                                                                         uses the project code for expense accounts only.

     MUN-72277        1       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Update                       prempupd                                         The Payroll Distribution Journal correctly posts
                                                                                                                                         salary and employer deduction expense amounts
                                                                                                                                         during a Void/Manual payroll in which employees
                                                                                                                                         are being paid in addition to a check being voided.

     MUN-61821        1       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Update                       prempac5                                         The program does not cause an error when
                                                                                                                                         inserting an accrual history record prior to the start-
                                                                                                                                         of-year (SOY) record.
     MUN-71572        1       Payroll - Payroll   Employee Update                       prempupd                                         The program does not delete Time Entry Detail
                                                                                                                                         records when the value of the Quantity box is 0
                                                                                                                                         and the records are linked to Human Services
                                                                                                                                         data.
     MUN-60383        3       Payroll - Payroll   Escrow Pay Categories, Payroll        prppcalc                                         The Escrow Pay Categories program includes the
                                                  Calculations (link routine)                                                            05 - Escrow by Flat Percentage (of Pay Earned)
                                                                                                                                         escrow type.
                                                                                                                                         This escrow calculation performs a percentage
                                                                                                                                         escrow based on hours entered. The calculation
                                                                                                                                         uses the calendar to recognize escrow days, but
                                                                                                                                         does not reset the employee's hours. This allows
                                                                                                                                         you to enter hours using Time Entry or to adjust
                                                                                                                                         hours using Payroll Earnings and Deductions.

     MUN-66074        2       Payroll - Payroll   General Ledger Distribution Journal   prjournl                                         Accrual and accrual off-set journal entries are
                                                                                                                                         created for project accounts when project accounts
                                                                                                                                         exist for expense accounts and the fields on the
                                                                                                                                         Accrual tab within the General Ledger Distribution
                                                                                                                                         Journal program are completed to define the
                                                                                                                                         entries.
     MUN-58585        3       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Earnings and Deductions      prgenddp                                         Calculating by hours is not the default calculation
                                                                                                                                         process. The hours calculation only occurs if time
                                                                                                                                         entry records are entered in hours.

     MUN-67737        3       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Earnings and Deductions      prgenddp                                         For automatically docked records, the program
                                                                                                                                         clears the Comments box when records are initially
                                                                                                                                         created.



45                                                                                d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                            (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module    Primary Program                          Affected Program(s)        Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                  Change Needed

     MUN-20003        3       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Earnings and Deductions         prgenddp                                       For the Generate category in the Payroll Control
                                                                                                                                          Settings program, the Default Dates on Multi-Level
                                                                                                                                          Add option is available. This option, when enabled,
                                                                                                                                          completes the Start and End Dates for multi-level
                                                                                                                                          generate processing with the dates provided in the
                                                                                                                                          active payroll.
     MUN-63356        1       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Earnings and Deductions         prgenddp                                       The program completes the contract buyout
                                                                                                                                          process for one check without error.
     MUN-51123        2       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Earnings and Deductions         prgenddp                                       The report's subtract-from-base process considers
                                                                                                                                          accrual amounts, but it does not attempt to break
                                                                                                                                          down accrual records if the date is not within the
                                                                                                                                          base pay records. The subtract-from-base accrual
                                                                                                                                          amounts outside of base pay records are ignored
                                                                                                                                          on the report but process properly on the post.

     MUN-61482        3       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Earnings and Deductions         prgenddp                                       When generating records, the program clears the
                                                                                                                                          accrual impact details before processing to ensure
                                                                                                                                          that accrual pays are managed correctly.


     MUN-66144        1       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Earnings and Deductions         prgenddp                                       When you are moving Pending Time Entry records
                                                                                                                                          and using the Subtract from Base option, the
                                                                                                                                          program does not cause an error when there is no
                                                                                                                                          base pay in the batch from which to subtract.

     MUN-75538        1       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Earnings and Deductions         prpdcalc                                       Calculation code 32 deduction amounts calculate
                                                  (link routine)                                                                          correctly when type 9 exceptions are in place.

     MUN-73380        1       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Earnings and Deductions         prpdcalc                                       The reference salary for a pay linked with a
                                                  (link routine)                                                                          calculation code 36 deduction takes the value of
                                                                                                                                          the Pay Status list in the Employee Job/Salary
                                                                                                                                          program into account. If the value of the list is I-
                                                                                                                                          Inactive, the program ignores the amount when
                                                                                                                                          calculating calc code 36 amounts.

     MUN-69178        1       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Earnings and Deductions         prpdcalc                                       When exclusions exist, the process for
                                                  (link routine)                                                                          recalculating calc code 36 deductions within a
                                                                                                                                          payroll is completed more efficiently.
     MUN-68065        2       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Earnings and Deductions         prgended, prgenpay                             When a base pay's allocation includes a record
                                                  (link routine), Generate Payroll (link                                                  with a different location, the life insurance noncash
                                                  routine)                                                                                pay account is correctly generated.


     MUN-63758        2       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Earnings and Deductions,        prpyddpf, prgenddp                             For the Time Entry move process, the program
                                                  Earnings and Deductions Proof                                                           immediately checks for Time Entry records with
                                                                                                                                          null pay codes; if records exist, the program
                                                                                                                                          cancels the move process, displays a Call
                                                                                                                                          Technical Support message, and creates a detail
                                                                                                                                          report that the Technical Support team can use to
                                                                                                                                          trace the errant records.
                                                                                                                                          If an earnings/deductions out-of-balance error
                                                                                                                                          occurs, the proof report process attempts to
                                                                                                                                          display up to 10 employee records that may be
                                                                                                                                          affecting the error. The out-of-balance verification
                                                                                                                                          process is completed by comparing the total sum
                                                                                                                                          of period amounts (pays or deductions)against the
                                                                                                                                          sum of all pays/deduction in the payroll.


     MUN-59189        3       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Earnings/Deductions             prgenddp                                       The program fully processes the previous FLSA
                                                                                                                                          period whether or not the calculation results in
                                                                                                                                          overtime hours being generated.
     MUN-63200        1       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Employees (link routine)        prgenemp                                       The program correctly adds Category M - Amt/Hrs
                                                                                                                                          Blended Rate pays into the Employee Job/Salary
                                                                                                                                          records with a zero value in the Scheduled Hours
                                                                                                                                          box.

46                                                                                 d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                          (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module    Primary Program                         Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                             Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                        Change Needed

     MUN-73469        2       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Payroll (link routine)         prgendep                                            The Payroll Generate process correctly includes
                                                                                                                                              employee amounts for deductions with calculation
                                                                                                                                              code 24 when creating a new payroll (or adding an
                                                                                                                                              employee with this deduction to a payroll using the
                                                                                                                                              Payroll Earnings and Deductions program).

     MUN-68207        1       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Pays (link routine)            prgenpay                                            Employee pay allocations correctly generate in the
                                                                                                                                              Payroll Earnings and Deductions program.
     MUN-61877        1       Payroll - Payroll   Generate Pays (link routine)            prgenpay                                            The Payroll Earnings and Deductions program
                                                                                                                                              correctly identifies a payroll allocation that contains
                                                                                                                                              a null location value and correctly displays the
                                                                                                                                              allocation code.
     MUN-60053        3       Payroll - Payroll   GL Distribution Journal                 prjournl                                            The Split Between GL Periods check box is an
                                                                                                                                              option from which you can select to split the
                                                                                                                                              distribution by date. The Split Date box is
                                                                                                                                              available; if you select Split by Date, you must
                                                                                                                                              enter the appropriate date. If you select the Defer
                                                                                                                                              Cash Posting check box for the split period, there
                                                                                                                                              is more flexibility when using predefined payable
                                                                                                                                              accounts.
     MUN-69321        1       Payroll - Payroll   History Transfer                        prhstmnt                                            A history transfer is correct when a pay type was
                                                                                                                                              originally allocated and the record is being moved
                                                                                                                                              to another allocation.
     MUN-60163        2       Payroll - Payroll   History Transfer                        prhstmnt                                            History Transfer records are processed correctly
                                                                                                                                              when multiple earning org codes for an employee
                                                                                                                                              and check combination are present or when your
                                                                                                                                              organization uses object expense cross-
                                                                                                                                              functionality and also expense-by-fund
                                                                                                                                              functionality.
     MUN-62097        1       Payroll - Payroll   History Transfer                        prhstmnt                                            The program properly allocates employer expense
                                                                                                                                              amounts across accounts when exempt deductions
                                                                                                                                              exist. In order for you to find history records for
                                                                                                                                              which to transfer accounts, checks must have been
                                                                                                                                              printed for the record.

     MUN-28816        2       Payroll - Payroll   Job Class Default Pay/Deduction         prdpddfm, prdatefm, prmaster,                       Auditing for all tables that are viewable in
                                                  Types, Employee Master, Employee        premppay, prjobcls, priohlpr                        Employee Master (praddrss, prempphn, prempdpn,
                                                  Job/Salary, Job Class Master                                                                prempemg, and prdatefl) are turned on and when
                                                                                                                                              you click View History in Employee Master, the
                                                                                                                                              results include these tables.
                                                                                                                                              For Job Class Default Pay/Deduction Types,
                                                                                                                                              auditing for tables prdefpay, prdefded and prdefacc
                                                                                                                                              is turned on and the View History results include
                                                                                                                                              these tables. (This change applies to the program
                                                                                                                                              when it is accessed from Position Control and
                                                                                                                                              Employee Job/Salary.)


     MUN-57928        3       Payroll - Payroll   Kronos Synchronization Export           prkrnsyn                        Chesapeake, VA      The Kronos Synchronization Export program
                                                                                                                                              creates a Kronos import file that contains all
                                                                                                                                              employee records for which there has been a
                                                                                                                                              specified data changed within a defined time
                                                                                                                                              frame.




47                                                                                  d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                               (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module    Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)               Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                         Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                    Change Needed

     MUN-65463        2       Payroll - Payroll   Kronos Synchronization Export         prkrnsyn                          Chesapeake, VA      The Org range is removed from the Define screen,
                                                                                                                                              which means that you can no longer include or
                                                                                                                                              exclude employees according to org codes. The
                                                                                                                                              value of the Sick Bank Status field in the export
                                                                                                                                              comes directly from Employee Master. The value
                                                                                                                                              of the FLSA status comes directly from Employee
                                                                                                                                              Job/Salary record; the program uses this value to
                                                                                                                                              determine the value of the Employee Type (exempt
                                                                                                                                              or not exempt from FLSA).
                                                                                                                                              When the program encounters errors when
                                                                                                                                              processing using Munis Scheduler, it creates an
                                                                                                                                              export file of employee records with no errors, but
                                                                                                                                              alerts you that errors occurred. Errors can be
                                                                                                                                              viewed in the Scheduler Queue Maintenance
                                                                                                                                              program.
                                                                                                                                              If there is an error in the Work Phone Type field,
                                                                                                                                              the program displays a message in the status bar,
                                                                                                                                              but continues processing, setting the value of the
                                                                                                                                              Work Phone field to space in the export file but
                                                                                                                                              including the employee record with remaining data
                                                                                                                                              fields completed.

     MUN-69929        3       Payroll - Payroll   Kronos Synchronization Export         prkrnsyn                          Chesapeake, VA      The program exports each individual account
                                                                                                                                              segment along with the long object code and
                                                                                                                                              project code. In addition, the export file includes
                                                                                                                                              project account segments.
     MUN-63379        3       Payroll - Payroll   Life Insurance                        prlifins                                              Oracle® specific: When you open the program, the
                                                                                                                                              interface displays correctly.
     MUN-52641        2       Payroll - Payroll   Longevity Codes                       prlongfm                                              The Longevity Codes program does not allow you
                                                                                                                                              to add tables with a code that has a preceding zero
                                                                                                                                              (for example, 01, 02, 03, and so on). The code,
                                                                                                                                              although stored as a alphanumeric code, must be
                                                                                                                                              numeric.
     MUN-26685        2       Payroll - Payroll   Manual Check Reconciliation           prchkhis                                              The program allows you to find and clear a specific
                                                                                                                                              check or a range of checks for terminated
                                                                                                                                              employees without moving their employee record
                                                                                                                                              to your active (live) database. This allows you to
                                                                                                                                              add, and subsequently find, manual checks for
                                                                                                                                              terminated employees.
     MUN-62681        3       Payroll - Payroll   Mass Step Increases                   prstpinc                                              The program properly prints the proof and error
                                                                                                                                              reports using PDF when you select the PDF
                                                                                                                                              option.
     MUN-66912        1       Payroll - Payroll   MI ORS Retirement Report              prmisers                          Michigan            The program retrieves the sum of all specified
                                                                                                                                              employer and employee hybrid contributions and
                                                                                                                                              processes correctly according to the value of the
                                                                                                                                              Use Check Dates check box.
     MUN-64097        1       Payroll - Payroll   Multiple Payroll Programs                                                                   If Microsoft Excel export files include links to
                                                                                                                                              records in stored in Munis, the program displays
                                                                                                                                              the data correctly even if Tyler Dashboard is not
                                                                                                                                              available to facilitate the linking.

     MUN-63333        3       Payroll - Payroll   Multiple Payroll Programs             prdedmst, prempupd, pjcalben,                         If your organization uses the Full account entry
                                                                                        prdedbenio, prglfundio,                               mode, you can define individual segments of an
                                                                                        prexplib, prpaytyp, prgleorgio,                       account within the Deduction Master, Expense by
                                                                                        prencumb, prhstmnt, prremded,                         Fund, and Expense by Org programs. These
                                                                                        pjbuddet, pjjobval, pmposbud,                         segments are blended into accounts previously
                                                                                        prhlrmit, prtxstat                                    created based on account hierarchy where general
                                                                                                                                              ledger accounts are built within Payroll and Human
                                                                                                                                              Resource/Personnel programs.




48                                                                                d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                             (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module    Primary Program                        Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                    Change Needed

     MUN-69682        1       Payroll - Payroll   Multiple Payroll Programs              prupdprj, atreqmnt, krkronos,                       Multiple payroll programs and Web services
                                                                                         pmposctl, pmwsappl, practivy,                       include project codes from the project accounting
                                                                                         prallmnt, prctlfil, prdistrp,                       master (pamaster) table. The programs include:
                                                                                         prearnrp, prempmas, preschls,                       Global Project Update, Job Openings, Vendor
                                                                                         prjobcls, prkycsdr, prkypsdr,                       Import, Position Control, Time Entry Activity,
                                                                                         prpaytyp, prpyrlfm, prterule,                       Payroll Allocation, Payroll Control Settings, Detail
                                                                                         prtimatt, prtkearn, prtkexpt,                       Distribution Report, Flexible Period Earnings
                                                                                         prwshelp                                            Report, Condensed Employee Master, eSchools
                                                                                                                                             Import/Export, Job Class Master, CSD
                                                                                                                                             Report/Electronic File, PSD Report/Electronic File,
                                                                                                                                             Pay Master, Payroll Earnings and Deductions,
                                                                                                                                             Time Entry Rules, Time Entry, Timekeeper
                                                                                                                                             Earnings, and Timekeeper Export.


     MUN-59237        3       Payroll - Payroll   Overtime Tables, Generate Earnings     provrtim, prgenddp                                  In the Overtime Tables program, the Exclude
                                                  and Deductions                                                                             Accrual Amounts check box applies to FLSA type
                                                                                                                                             B processing when you are using Time Entry
                                                                                                                                             process.
     MUN-69153        3       Payroll - Payroll   Pay Type Master, Employee              prpaytyp, premppay, pmposctl,                       General ledger accounts display correctly when
                                                  Job/Salary, Position Control, Job      prjobcls                                            using the long account and long object code.
                                                  Class Master

     MUN-64534        2       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Allocations                    prallmnt                                            The Find-Emp option processes search criteria
                                                                                                                                             without error and displays the correct results.
     MUN-49319        2       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Allocations                    prallmnt                                            When you click Find Emp, and then update the
                                                                                                                                             selected record, the program does not cause an
                                                                                                                                             error.
     MUN-67191        1       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Audit Inquiry                  praudinq                                            The Employee Number is a key field that allows
                                                                                                                                             you to find records by employee number across all
                                                                                                                                             tables in the Payroll Audit Inquiry program.

     MUN-80188        1       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Audit Inquiry                  praudinq, praudlnk                                  The Synchronize process completes more
                                                                                                                                             efficiently with the two types of synchronizations
                                                                                                                                             done independently of one another.

     MUN-62776        1       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Audit Inquiry                  praudinq, praudlnk                                  The Synchronize process is available to
                                                                                                                                             synchronize data between the new and original
                                                                                                                                             payroll audit programs. This process allows you to
                                                                                                                                             complete custom reports without making changes
                                                                                                                                             and to post actions that were created before
                                                                                                                                             implementing the new audit program.

     MUN-78623        1       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Audit Inquiry                  praudinq                                            When you click View History in payroll programs,
                                                                                                                                             the program displays a record's history details
                                                                                                                                             without error.
     MUN-64719        3       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Audit Inquiry, Payroll Audit   praudinq, praudopt                                  The table descriptions include user-friendly names
                                                  Options                                                                                    for identification.

     MUN-72367        2       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Audit Inquiry, Payroll         praudlnk, praudinq, spwshdlr,                       For the internal processing of payroll applications,
                                                  Input/Output Routines                  Payroll IO Routines                                 extra database queries are removed to improve
                                                                                                                                             the efficiency of the process.


     MUN-67525        1       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Check Register                 prchkreg                                            The program displays detail records for the BAC
                                                                                                                                             format option.
     MUN-61946        2       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Control Settings               prctlfil                                            On the Generate screen, when you define default
                                                                                                                                             values for the Excluded Deduction ranges, the
                                                                                                                                             program saves the values.
     MUN-59722        3       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Control Settings               prppcalc                                            The Escrow Pay Distribution on Inactive Escrow
                                                                                                                                             Earning option is available for the General
                                                                                                                                             category. If the value of this option is Y-Yes, you
                                                                                                                                             can process category I-Inactive pays against
                                                                                                                                             employees who are not currently active for escrow
                                                                                                                                             pay.


49                                                                                 d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                            (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module    Primary Program                          Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                         Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                    Change Needed

     MUN-68994        2       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Control Settings, Accruals       prwseacc                                           The Force Accrual Limit settings is available for
                                                  (Web services)                                                                              the ESS Accruals category in the Payroll Control
                                                                                                                                              Settings program. This setting enforces the accrual
                                                                                                                                              limit in ESS if the projected accrual time exceeds
                                                                                                                                              the accrual limit for the year.


     MUN-68811        3       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Control Settings, Employee    prctlfil, prsalnfy, prsalnfyio,                       Employee Salary Notifications
                                                  Salary Notifications, Employee Salary prsalgen, prwssaln                                    The Position/Job tab includes the Hourly Rate,
                                                  Notifications (Web services)                                                                Daily Rate, Hours/Day, Days/Year, and FTE
                                                                                                                                              boxes.
                                                                                                                                              The Salary tab includes a total of ten Additional
                                                                                                                                              Pays lists.
                                                                                                                                              The Settings button provides direct access to the
                                                                                                                                              Payroll Control Settings associated with the
                                                                                                                                              Employee Salary Notifications process.
                                                                                                                                              Payroll Control Settings
                                                                                                                                              The General category includes the Realtime Salary
                                                                                                                                              Notification option with the values of Yes, No, or
                                                                                                                                              Realtime Data after Verification.
                                                                                                                                              When Yes (on) is selected, the ESS Total
                                                                                                                                              Compensation information is considered real-time
                                                                                                                                              and pulls directly from the employee's pay
                                                                                                                                              information stored in Munis. Whenever employee
                                                                                                                                              actions are completed and employee records are
                                                                                                                                              updated, the corresponding screen in Employee
                                                                                                                                              Self Service is also updated.
                                                                                                                                              When the value is No (off), the ESS Total
                                                                                                                                              Compensation information displays whatever was
                                                                                                                                              most recently generated in the Employee Salary
                                                                                                                                              Notification program for the employee. It does not
                                                                                                                                              include any employee actions made since this
                                                                                                                                              option was set to No. (Note: The correct sequence
                                                                                                                                              for using this option is to general all appropriate
                                                                                                                                              Employee Salary Notification records and then
                                                                                                                                              setting this option to No (off).
                                                                                                                                              When the value is Realtime Data after Verification,
                                                                                                                                              the ESS Total Compensation information displays
                                                                                                                                              whatever was last generated in the Employee
     MUN-70239        3       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Control Settings, Employee       prempupd, prgenddp, prppcalc                       In the Payroll Control Settings program, the Allow
                                                  Update, Generate Earnings and                                                               Zero Pay Records to be Moved to the Payroll
                                                  Deductions, Generate Earnings and                                                           option is available in the Time Entry category.
                                                  Deductions (link routine)                                                                   When you enable this option, zero pay records can
                                                                                                                                              be posted to a payroll, allowing your organization
                                                                                                                                              to generate employees using an autoload and
                                                                                                                                              including those employees within a payroll even if
                                                                                                                                              they do not receive any hours. Note: Munis
                                                                                                                                              personnel recommend only enabling this option
                                                                                                                                              when necessary.
                                                                                                                                              During the Employee Update process, escrow type
                                                                                                                                              05 - Escrow by Flat Percentage (of Pay Earned)
                                                                                                                                              pays appropriately track escrow amounts.




     MUN-71649        1       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Earnings and Deductions          prpyrlfm,prgenemp                                  For subtract-from-base pay types, hours for base
                                                                                                                                              pay records on manual allocations within the
                                                                                                                                              Payroll Earnings and Deductions program are
                                                                                                                                              correct.
     MUN-63248        2       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Earnings and Deductions          prpyrlfm                                           If you add a calc code 60 pay, the program
                                                                                                                                              generates the Hours, Rate, and Amount with a
                                                                                                                                              value of 0 if an employee does not have an
                                                                                                                                              Employee Job/Salary record for the pay and no
                                                                                                                                              rate is defined in the Pay Master program.



50                                                                                d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                             (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module    Primary Program                        Affected Program(s)           Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                  Change Needed

     MUN-67847        1       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Earnings and Deductions        prpyrlfm                                          If you complete Vendor Processing, and then
                                                                                                                                           manually edit records using Payroll Earnings and
                                                                                                                                           Deductions, the Vendor Processing indicator in the
                                                                                                                                           Payroll Start and Status program is reset.

     MUN-61318        2       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Earnings and Deductions        prpyrlfm                                          The Deduction Gross box correctly displays
                                                                                                                                           amounts up to 999,999.99. When you click Browse
                                                                                                                                           from the Global Pay screen, the Pay Amount box
                                                                                                                                           correctly displays amounts up to 999,999.99.

     MUN-70898        1       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Earnings and Deductions        prpyddpf                                          When you are creating a final proof, the program
                                                  Proof                                                                                    does not cause an "Earnings out of balance" error
                                                                                                                                           due to the proof process failing to complete the
                                                                                                                                           data comparison and any necessary employee
                                                                                                                                           records recalculations.
     MUN-73244        3       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Earnings and Deductions        prpyddpf                                          When you click Display to view a final proof, the
                                                  Proof                                                                                    program displays a reminder message that Display
                                                                                                                                           does not update the status for the proof in the
                                                                                                                                           Payroll Start and Status program; you must click
                                                                                                                                           PDF, Print, or Save to update the status.

     MUN-75410        3       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Earnings and Deductions,       prpyrlfm, prtimatt                                In Payroll Earnings and Deductions, when you use
                                                  Time Entry                                                                               the default option for the general ledger account,
                                                                                                                                           the project code is correctly included. In Time
                                                                                                                                           Entry, if an invalid general ledger account is built
                                                                                                                                           using the default process, the program does not
                                                                                                                                           display the invalid account.
     MUN-63367        1       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Encumbering                    prencumb                                          On the Update Remaining Amounts screen, when
                                                                                                                                           the value of the Update Method list is F-
                                                                                                                                           Recompute from Fiscal YTD, the program correctly
                                                                                                                                           computes remaining salary amounts for all defined
                                                                                                                                           employees.
     MUN-74891        3       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll Field Values                   prfldval                                          The following values for ESS Salary Notification
                                                                                                                                           forms are updated: AAD0 => AAD10, PY0 =>
                                                                                                                                           APY10, and PAD0 => PAD10.

     MUN-62769        2       Payroll - Payroll   Payroll/Personnel Restrictions (link   prrestri                                          When the routine receives an invalid user record
                                                  routine)                                                                                 and fails to create a table, the program displays an
                                                                                                                                           informative error message.




     MUN-70230        2       Payroll - Payroll   Pending Applicants, Job Openings       atappreq, atreqmnt                                The GLO - GL Org Code and SEG - General
                                                                                                                                           Ledger Segments types are available for the ATA
                                                                                                                                           and ATN workflow process codes. When you
                                                                                                                                           specify these types in the Workflow Business
                                                                                                                                           Rules program for the ATA or ATN process codes,
                                                                                                                                           you can define approvers according to general
                                                                                                                                           ledger org code or segment ranges.

     MUN-66160        3       Payroll - Payroll   Position Budget Detail                 pmposbud                                          The Rebuild option correctly processes employee
                                                                                                                                           records with multiple allocated encumbered pays.

     MUN-65172        3       Payroll - Payroll   Position Control, Payroll Encumbering pmposbud, pmposctl,                                The encumbering update process subtracts current
                                                  Functions, Update Remaining           prencumb, prencupd, prencrst                       payroll amounts from the current encumbered
                                                  Amounts                                                                                  amounts for pays, deductions and positions.
                                                                                                                                           Additionally, in the Update Remaining Amounts
                                                                                                                                           program, the Position Budget Detail Updates
                                                                                                                                           Amount check box is available. If selected, the
                                                                                                                                           position budget process recalculates the position
                                                                                                                                           control summary fields (encumbered, expended,
                                                                                                                                           and so on).




51                                                                                d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                           (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module    Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                             Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                      Change Needed

     MUN-70960        3       Payroll - Payroll   Post Data to Payroll                  pjpstdat                                            The Post Type list includes the Remaining
                                                                                                                                            Amounts option. This option, when selected, proofs
                                                                                                                                            and posts amounts from the projection to live
                                                                                                                                            positions:
                                                                                                                                            *For positions found in the projection, the Current
                                                                                                                                            Year Revised Budget amount is pulled and posted
                                                                                                                                            to the Encumbered field in live.
                                                                                                                                            *For pays, the Reference Salary is pulled and
                                                                                                                                            posted to the Remaining field in live.
                                                                                                                                            *For deductions, the Annual Amount is pulled and
                                                                                                                                            posted to the Remaining field in live.
                                                                                                                                            The proof displays the new remaining amount in all
                                                                                                                                            cases and, optionally, displays errors for projection
                                                                                                                                            records that do not appropriately match up to
                                                                                                                                            current live records and a listing of live records that
                                                                                                                                            did not have a matching record in the projection.




     MUN-67346        2       Payroll - Payroll   Print Checks, Update Clear Date to    prchecks, prfxclrd                                  The Print Checks program does not update the
                                                  Check Date                                                                                database value for net amounts based on the
                                                                                                                                            check format selected for print or direct deposits.
                                                                                                                                            The Print Checks and Update Clear Date to Check
                                                                                                                                            Date programs set the check status to C-Cleared
                                                                                                                                            for all direct deposits.

     MUN-72673        2       Payroll - Payroll   Print Checks/Advices                  prchecks                                            For checks using the X-Check Export File option,
                                                                                                                                            the program prints the YTD Escrow Balance.

     MUN-61524        3       Payroll - Payroll   Print Checks/Advices                  prchecks                                            If the check printing process is not able to
                                                                                                                                            complete, the program does not create a file in the
                                                                                                                                            Saved Reports directory.
     MUN-67715        1       Payroll - Payroll   Print Checks/Advices                  prchecks                                            When you are reprinting checks/advices using
                                                                                                                                            numbers that were already assigned within current
                                                                                                                                            payroll, the program displays a message alerting
                                                                                                                                            you that specific checks will be voided while others
                                                                                                                                            will be overwritten if you proceed with the reprint of
                                                                                                                                            checks/advices.
     MUN-71242        2       Payroll - Payroll   Print Checks/Advices, Update Clear    prchecks, prfxclrd, prempupd                        The check status for checks with a net amount of
                                                  Date to Check Date, Employee                                                              zero is C-Cleared. When you are completing a
                                                  Update                                                                                    Void payroll, the voided check that is created by
                                                                                                                                            the Employee Update program has its clear date
                                                                                                                                            set to the new check date.

     MUN-60941        1       Payroll - Payroll   Print Payroll Advices, Update Clear   prchecks, prchkhis, prfxclrd,                       The Print Payroll Advices, Update Clear Date to
                                                  Date to Check Date, Employee          prempupd                                            Check Date, and Employee Update programs set
                                                  Update                                                                                    the clear date to the check date where
                                                                                                                                            prck_created is X-Voided Direct deposit or V-
                                                                                                                                            Voided Check.

     MUN-64722        2       Payroll - Payroll   Print Payroll Checks                  prchecks                                            When the value of the Check/Advice Format list is
                                                                                                                                            M - Prior Munis Standard, the program includes the
                                                                                                                                            rate from the base pay in the payroll on the check,
                                                                                                                                            even when there are no hours for the base pay.

     MUN-65822        3       Payroll - Payroll   Risk Code Reporting                   prrskrpt                                            If your organization uses the Full Account Entry
                                                                                                                                            method for general ledger accounts, the Workers
                                                                                                                                            Compensation Report prints the full account on the
                                                                                                                                            second line.
     MUN-73262        2       Payroll - Payroll   Risk Code Reporting                   prrskrpt                                            In the Workers Compensation Report, the Location
                                                                                                                                            and Org boxes provide more descriptive ToolTips.

     MUN-67452        3       Payroll - Payroll   TACS Export                           prtacsex                                            In the electronic file, the Employer Contribution
                                                                                                                                            and Employee Contribution totals are summed and
                                                                                                                                            displayed in the CTRL record in locations 47-56.


52                                                                               d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                                (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module    Primary Program                      Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                 Change Needed

     MUN-64320        3       Payroll - Payroll   TACS Export                          prtacsex                                           In the electronic TACs report, the Employee and
                                                                                                                                          Employer contributions are listed on separate
                                                                                                                                          lines, with -ER appended to all employer
                                                                                                                                          contribution codes for clarity.

     MUN-61789        3       Payroll - Payroll   TACS Export                          prtacsex                                           The report and export file includes the CONT line
                                                                                                                                          (contributions) using array positions 58-67 for the
                                                                                                                                          amount.
     MUN-63773        3       Payroll - Payroll   TEMS Configuration                   priohlpr, prtemslk, prtemscf                       The TEMS Configuration program is available.
                                                                                                                                          This program allows you to add or update
                                                                                                                                          employee data to the Tyler SIS database.
                                                                                                                                          Whenever an employee is added or updated,
                                                                                                                                          specific employee data and employee address
                                                                                                                                          data is pushed to Tyler SIS in the form of an XML
                                                                                                                                          string so that the data can either be added or
                                                                                                                                          updated in the Tyler SIS database. You can also
                                                                                                                                          push employee and employee address data for
                                                                                                                                          every employee in Munis to Tyler SIS to initially
                                                                                                                                          populate the Tyler SIS database or to synchronize
                                                                                                                                          the data between Munis and Tyler SIS databases.


     MUN-71047        3       Payroll - Payroll   TEMS Configuration, TEMS             prtemscf, prtemslk                                 The TEMS Configuration program and TEMS
                                                  Processing (link routine)                                                               Processing link routine read and update
                                                                                                                                          configuration settings using updated configuration
                                                                                                                                          functions.
     MUN-59090        3       Payroll - Payroll   Time and Attendance Entry, Time and prtimatt, prwsetae, prempatt,                       Supervisors can use Employee Self-Service (ESS)
                                                  Attendance History, Time and        prtmatdtio, prwshdlr                                to view time sheets of their direct reports. From
                                                  Attendance (Web services)                                                               this view, supervisors can approve or reject
                                                                                                                                          employee pays individually or as a group. There is
                                                                                                                                          a comment field available for each pay in which the
                                                                                                                                          supervisor can add applicable notes. When a time
                                                                                                                                          entry record is accepted or rejected, the
                                                                                                                                          application sends an e-mail notice to the
                                                                                                                                          employee. Once time entry records are approved,
                                                                                                                                          employees may no longer edit them through ESS
                                                                                                                                          Time Entry.
                                                                                                                                          In the Control and Run Control program, the Time
                                                                                                                                          Entry option should be ESS Approvals if your
                                                                                                                                          organization is approving time entry records using
                                                                                                                                          ESS. Once time entry records are approved, this
                                                                                                                                          option determines how the Time Entry Find
                                                                                                                                          Pending process identifies ESS time entry records.
                                                                                                                                          Selecting the ESS Approvals option in the Control
                                                                                                                                          and Run Control program directs that only time
                                                                                                                                          entry records approved using ESS should be
                                                                                                                                          included in a time entry batch.
                                                                                                                                          Once included in a time entry batch, approved ESS
                                                                                                                                          time entry records are processed normally.
                                                                                                                                          Additionally, on the Audit tab of the Detail screen,
                                                                                                                                          there is additional information displayed that
                                                                                                                                          shows the approved status, who approved the time
     MUN-59111        2       Payroll - Payroll   Time and Attendance History          prempatt                                           When you click Find to create an active set of
                                                                                                                                          records, the program properly selects allocations
                                                                                                                                          according to defined restrictions.
     MUN-64904        3       Payroll - Payroll   Time Entry                           prtimatt                                           During a basic import, the Time Entry program
                                                                                                                                          correctly completes the default values for payroll
                                                                                                                                          activity.
     MUN-71846        2       Payroll - Payroll   Time Entry                           prtimatt                                           During the reporting process, the program correctly
                                                                                                                                          sorts and subtotals full general ledger account
                                                                                                                                          details.
     MUN-72619        1       Payroll - Payroll   Time Entry                           prtimatt                                           The Add process verifies that a header records
                                                                                                                                          exists prior to inserting a new record.
     MUN-58793        2       Payroll - Payroll   Time Entry                           prgenddp                                           The Dock Report successfully saves to the Saved
                                                                                                                                          Reports directory when you click the Save button
                                                                                                                                          on the toolbar.

53                                                                              d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                            (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module    Primary Program                     Affected Program(s)         Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                              Change Needed

     MUN-63572        1       Payroll - Payroll   Time Entry                          prtimatt                                        The folder button for the Allocation box on the
                                                                                                                                      Time Entry Detail Entry screen is not active if the
                                                                                                                                      Time Entry Detail Grid, from which you open the
                                                                                                                                      Time Entry Detail screen, is in Update mode. To
                                                                                                                                      adjust the account or split time over multiple
                                                                                                                                      accounts, you must exit Update mode in the Time
                                                                                                                                      Entry Detail screen and then click Edit Details on
                                                                                                                                      the Time Entry Daily Grid screen (that is, the main
                                                                                                                                      screen for Time Entry Daily Grid entries).

     MUN-70407        3       Payroll - Payroll   Time Entry                          prtimatt                                        The import process includes project accounts:
                                                                                                                                      segment fields 1 through four, allocation the full
                                                                                                                                      account, as well as fields for substitute records.
                                                                                                                                      The process also includes the project account if
                                                                                                                                      the data is not imported, but the project code exists
                                                                                                                                      on the Employee Job/Salary record.
                                                                                                                                      When a pay code is changed in the Detail Entry,
                                                                                                                                      the program allows the project account to be
                                                                                                                                      properly updated.

     MUN-72600        2       Payroll - Payroll   Time Entry                          prtimatt                                        The pay rate refreshes from the Employee
                                                                                                                                      Job/Salary program unless the rate is a manual
                                                                                                                                      change from a calculated pay rate.
     MUN-66325        2       Payroll - Payroll   Time Entry                          prtimatt, prgenddp                              The program correctly creates the Accrual
                                                                                                                                      Overage Report according to the Summary or
                                                                                                                                      Detail report option.
     MUN-65205        1       Payroll - Payroll   Time Entry                          prtimatt                                        The Workflow Release process cancels previous
                                                                                                                                      workflow processes, as appropriate.
     MUN-70418        1       Payroll - Payroll   Time Entry (Web services)           prwsetae                                        The process that clears existing pay records
                                                                                                                                      ignores pay records for the Use for ESS Time
                                                                                                                                      Entry check box is not selected in the Pay Master
                                                                                                                                      program.
     MUN-54322        3       Payroll - Payroll   Time Entry History                  prempatt                                        For allocated records that are manually assigned,
                                                                                                                                      the program does not product a GL Mask not
                                                                                                                                      Found error.
     MUN-49965        2       Payroll - Payroll   Time Entry, Generate Earnings and   prgenddp, prtimatt                              Time Entry batch headers are locked during the
                                                  Deductions                                                                          move-to-payroll process. This In Processing lock is
                                                                                                                                      indicated by an X in the Posted box. During the
                                                                                                                                      locked time, you cannot add to or modify the Time
                                                                                                                                      Entry batch. The In Processing status lasts the
                                                                                                                                      entire time of the Move process, including while
                                                                                                                                      the proof is created and displayed. For batches
                                                                                                                                      that are not posted to the payroll, the program
                                                                                                                                      resets the value of the Posted box to No.
                                                                                                                                      Within Time Entry, the program examines the
                                                                                                                                      value of the Posted box prior to any editing of any
                                                                                                                                      record, which allows you to open a time entry
                                                                                                                                      record prior to another user starting the Move
                                                                                                                                      process, but still allows the Posted status to
                                                                                                                                      properly prevent editing of existing records.




54                                                                             d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                          (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                Primary Program                        Affected Program(s)              Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Change Needed

     MUN-71177        3       Payroll - Payroll               Time Entry, Payroll Earnings and       prtimatt, prpyrlfm, prgenpay,                        When the Payroll Earnings and Deductions or
                                                              Deductions, Payroll Control Settings   prgensum                                             Time Entry program completes the default value
                                                                                                                                                          for a pay code (either through an import or
                                                                                                                                                          standard entry), the programs verify the Payroll
                                                                                                                                                          Control Settings option GL Account Default Checks
                                                                                                                                                          Basepay. If this option is enabled, the process
                                                                                                                                                          looks for the general ledger account number from
                                                                                                                                                          the job or pay code within the Employee
                                                                                                                                                          Job/Salary program. If the account number does
                                                                                                                                                          not exist, then the standard general ledger account
                                                                                                                                                          process is used with the following adjustment:
                                                                                                                                                          *All available general ledger account data from
                                                                                                                                                          Pay Type Master.
                                                                                                                                                          *If the option is enabled - All available general
                                                                                                                                                          ledger account data from the Employee Job/Salary
                                                                                                                                                          record for the base pay based upon the specified
                                                                                                                                                          job (to complete general ledger data not completed
                                                                                                                                                          from Pay Type Master).
                                                                                                                                                          *All available general ledger account data from Job
                                                                                                                                                          Class Master (to complete general ledger data not
                                                                                                                                                          completed from Pay Type Master and Employee
                                                                                                                                                          Job/Salary).
                                                                                                                                                          *All general ledger account data from the
                                                                                                                                                          Employee Master record (to complete any general
                                                                                                                                                          ledger data not completed from the Pay Type
                                                                                                                                                          Master, Employee Job/Salary, and Job Class
                                                                                                                                                          Master).
                                                                                                                                                          When the GL Account Default Checks Basepay
     MUN-63537        3       Payroll - Payroll               Time Entry, Time Entry Groups          prtimatt, prtimgrp, prtimgrpio                       The Time Entry Groups includes the Basis option.
                                                                                                                                                          This option provides the basis for how the autoload
                                                                                                                                                          process restricts records being added. The Status
                                                                                                                                                          option is the default option, only allows active, by
                                                                                                                                                          status records to be loaded. The Dates option only
                                                                                                                                                          allows active, by date, records to be loaded.

     MUN-71483        2       Payroll - Payroll               Update Remaining Amounts               prencupd                                             The process does not omit accrual pays that are
                                                                                                                                                          not found in the Employee Job/Salary record. This
                                                                                                                                                          allows the program to properly allow accrual pays
                                                                                                                                                          to be processed against the base pay.

     MUN-66513        1       Payroll - Payroll               Update Remaining Amounts               pmposbud                                             When processing remaining amounts, the program
                                                                                                                                                          includes expended amounts by earnings history
                                                                                                                                                          and deduction history, rather than by accumulators
                                                                                                                                                          by employee, making mid-year employee and
                                                                                                                                                          position change records more accurate.

     MUN-79320        1       Payroll - Payroll               W-2 Electronic File                    prw2magm                                             The W-2 electronic file includes records for
                                                                                                                                                          employees who have wages in any W-2 box code.

     MUN-74561        1       Payroll - Payroll               W-2 Forms Print                        prw2prnt                                             For the XML format, the employer EIN includes
                                                                                                                                                          dash after the first two digits.
     MUN-76019        1       Payroll - Payroll               W-2 Forms Print                        prw2prnt                                             The program directs only two Box 14 values to
                                                                                                                                                          Tyler Forms during the W-2 XML export.
     MUN-74214        1       Payroll - Payroll               W-2 Forms Print                        prw2prnt                                             The XML format includes leading zeroes for the
                                                                                                                                                          employer EIN.
     MUN-67131        3       Payroll - Payroll               Work Location Codes                    prwrkloc                                             The Add, Update, and Delete processes use
                                                                                                                                                          input/output (I/O) functionality.
     MUN-76199        1       Payroll - Payroll Projections   Position Control                       pmposctl                                             The Vacant functionality within Projection Position
                                                                                                                                                          Control correctly creates all deductions associated
                                                                                                                                                          with a position for each vacant employee record
                                                                                                                                                          created.
     MUN-74878        3       Payroll - Payroll Projections   Post Data to Payroll                   pjpstdat                                             The program properly retains current data between
                                                                                                                                                          transaction resets when posting. The program also
                                                                                                                                                          properly verifies the pay data.



55                                                                                            d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                              (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                          Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Change Needed

     MUN-71766        2       Payroll - Payroll Projections    Post Projection Data to Budget           pjbuddet                                           Deduction amounts up to eight digits are posted to
                                                                                                                                                           the general ledger from a salary and benefit
                                                                                                                                                           projection (99,999,999.99).

     MUN-65726        1       Payroll - Payroll Projections    Projection Benefit Calculate             pjcalben                                           The program correctly excludes pay types with
                                                                                                                                                           allocation codes attached in Projection Employee
                                                                                                                                                           Job/Salary according to defined payroll exclusions.

     MUN-58316        2       Payroll - Payroll Projections    Projection Position Control              pmposctl                                           When you use the Vacant option, the program
                                                                                                                                                           completes the default value for the Calendar list on
                                                                                                                                                           the Salary Data tab.
     MUN-42819        2       Payroll - Payroll Projections    Projection Salary Calculate              pjcalsal                                           The Days Paid value in the output is correct when
                                                                                                                                                           a calendar ends on a day that is not a work day.

     MUN-63210        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Action Entry, Actions Rapid Entry        pmactpen, pmrapdfm, ASCII                          The Fields List in the Actions Rapid Entry Fields
                                                               Fields                                   changes                                            program includes the Probation Start and
                                                                                                                                                           Probation End Dates option. These dates are
                                                                                                                                                           stored in the Employee Master program.

     MUN-72611        1       Payroll - Personnel Management   Actions Entry                            pmactpen                                           Informix®-specific
                                                                                                                                                           The Personnel Actions Entry program opens
                                                                                                                                                           without error.
     MUN-59908        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Actions Entry                            pmactpen                                           The PAF displays the date the workflow action was
                                                                                                                                                           approved and not the date the workflow approval
                                                                                                                                                           action was requested.
     MUN-60264        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Actions Entry                            pmactpen                                           The program correctly creates the PAF when
                                                                                                                                                           processing data for new hire actions.
     MUN-68462        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Actions Entry                            pmactpen, pmachist, prdelmov                       The Replacing and Interviews tabs are available.
                                                                                                                                                           The Replacing tab includes details for the
                                                                                                                                                           employee whom a new hire is replacing; the
                                                                                                                                                           Interviews tab includes hiring details for the new
                                                                                                                                                           employee. These tabs are only available when you
                                                                                                                                                           enter action codes for which the Show
                                                                                                                                                           Replacements and Show Interviews check boxes
                                                                                                                                                           are selected in the Action Codes program.


     MUN-69971        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Actions Entry                            pmactpen, pmwinint                                 When a New Employee default checklist with the
                                                                                                                                                           type P-Personnel is available in the Checklists
                                                                                                                                                           program and you create a new hire action in the
                                                                                                                                                           Actions Entry program, the program automatically
                                                                                                                                                           adds the New Employee checklist to the record at
                                                                                                                                                           the time you create the record.

     MUN-67614        1       Payroll - Personnel Management   Actions Entry                            pmactpen                                           When you are completing new hire actions and you
                                                                                                                                                           are prevented from adding or editing the Date of
                                                                                                                                                           Birth box, the program displays a clear message
                                                                                                                                                           indicating that you do not have the appropriate
                                                                                                                                                           permissions for viewing or maintaining Date of
                                                                                                                                                           Birth data.
     MUN-66850        1       Payroll - Personnel Management   Actions Entry                            pmactpen                                           When you post multiple actions, the program
                                                                                                                                                           correctly posts multiple Action History records and
                                                                                                                                                           creates multiple PAF entries for each action.

     MUN-69405        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Actions Entry, Condensed Employee        pmactpen, prdelmov,                                To be compatible with Microsoft Silverlight
                                                               Master                                   prempmas, pmradpfm                                 processing, employee records are created before
                                                                                                                                                           Actions Entry processing.
     MUN-66582        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Actions Entry, Condensed Employee        pmactpen                                           When the program copies application information
                                                               Master                                                                                      from Actions Entry to Condensed Employee
                                                                                                                                                           Master, the process includes all applicable
                                                                                                                                                           applicant details.
     MUN-70093        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Actions History, Actions Inquiry         pmachist, pmactinq                                 When you click Find in Actions History or Actions
                                                                                                                                                           Inquiry and enter the same search criteria, the
                                                                                                                                                           results are the same. However, if the action code
                                                                                                                                                           included in Action History records has been
                                                                                                                                                           deleted, these records are only included in Actions
                                                                                                                                                           Inquiry searches.
56                                                                                                d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                           (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                Change Needed

     MUN-66333        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Employee Benefits Enrollment          pmbnenrl                                            The Dependents/Beneficiaries screen does not
                                                                                                                                                         require a value for the Social Security number.
     MUN-62451        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Employee Benefits Enrollment          pmbnenrl                                            The Enrollment Date on the Proof-Post screen is
                                                                                                                                                         correctly applied to dependent records.
     MUN-82338        1       Payroll - Personnel Management   Employee Benefits Enrollment          pmbnenrl                                            The program correctly processes all benefit
                                                                                                                                                         choices regardless of restrictions associated with a
                                                                                                                                                         specific choice, and also when the Percentage of
                                                                                                                                                         Salary restriction is selected for Salary Based
                                                                                                                                                         Disability option.
     MUN-57424        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Employee Benefits Enrollment,         pmwsnenr, pmbnenrl,                                 In the Enrollment Restrictions program, the Type
                                                               Benefits Enrollment (Web services),   pmenrres, pmenrded                                  list includes the Percentage of Salary option.
                                                               Enrollment Restrictions, Enrollment                                                       Select this option for salary-based disability
                                                               Choices                                                                                   restrictions.

     MUN-64213        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Employee Case Management              pmcmcase                                            When you access case management records from
                                                                                                                                                         Workflow Assistant, the program provides the
                                                                                                                                                         correct records.
     MUN-61683        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Employee Case Management              wfpclink                                            When you complete Workflow options from the
                                                                                                                                                         Stages screen, the program continues to process.

     MUN-69290        1       Payroll - Personnel Management   Employee Injuries and Illnesses       pmosflmt                                            This program is available to users who do not have
                                                                                                                                                         Payroll Retirement Category permissions. The
                                                                                                                                                         Retirement Category is used to determine Social
                                                                                                                                                         Security number view permissions.
     MUN-67618        1       Payroll - Personnel Management   Employee Job/Salary                   premppay                                            In Actions Entry, when you delete a pay that
                                                                                                                                                         includes calc code 93 or calc code 94, Employee
                                                                                                                                                         Job/Salary recalculates the pay rate.

     MUN-62064        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Employee Substance Testing            pmsubsmt                                            When you complete the Create-Recs process, the
                                                                                                                                                         program does not create additional records within
                                                                                                                                                         the same pool for active employees.
     MUN-71237        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Employee Training                     pmtrnemp                                            The Course Length box defines the length of the
                                                                                                                                                         selected course. The program completes this value
                                                                                                                                                         from the Training Courses program.
     MUN-68258        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Employee Training                     pmtrnemp                                            The Create Invoices option is available. This
                                                                                                                                                         option allows you to create General Billing invoices
                                                                                                                                                         for employees who are responsible for paying to
                                                                                                                                                         participate in training courses.
     MUN-65247        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Employee Training                     pmtrnemp                                            The waitlist tracking process does not count the
                                                                                                                                                         current employee record more than one time when
                                                                                                                                                         verifying the waitlist size.
     MUN-59890        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Employee Training                     pmtrnemp, wfpmlink                                  When an enrollment record is approved using
                                                                                                                                                         Workflow Assistant, the program distributes the
                                                                                                                                                         enrollment notice.
     MUN-50136        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Institution Codes                     pminscod                                            The program does not allow you to purge multiple
                                                                                                                                                         times without completing the Find process.
                                                                                                                                                         When you import records, the Import process does
                                                                                                                                                         not repeatedly produce the same error.

     MUN-68879        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Job Openings                          atreqmnt                                            For the Location and Group/BU fields, the program
                                                                                                                                                         does not use default values from the Job Class
                                                                                                                                                         Master program to overwrite existing position
                                                                                                                                                         control values.
     MUN-65183        1       Payroll - Personnel Management   Job Openings                          atreqmnt (ascii only, changed                       Workflow e-mail messages to pending applicants
                                                                                                     for the benefit of the MIU)                         that are initiated by the ATA - Job Opening
                                                                                                                                                         Applicant Hire process contain the applicant
                                                                                                                                                         number in place of the Social Security number
                                                                                                                                                         (SSN).




57                                                                                            d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                             (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                         Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                             Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Change Needed

     MUN-69238        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Multiple HR/Payroll Programs            atappreq, atreqmnt, pjsetrun,                       In Personnel Settings, when the Show Leading
                                                                                                       pmachist, pmacthis, pmactinq,                       Zeros check box is selected and the number of
                                                                                                       pmempeva, pmemppds,                                 digits in the position number is specified in the
                                                                                                       pmparmnt, pmpdlink, pmpdtrmt,                       Length of Position Number list, Payroll and Human
                                                                                                       pmposctl, pmposhis,                                 Resource programs display and print the position
                                                                                                       pmposvac, pmttempe, pmttlcrp,                       number with the leading zeroes.
                                                                                                       pmttpamt, pmttvpmt, pmwsrstc,
                                                                                                       prctlfil, premprec, prmaster,
                                                                                                       prpyddpf, prtimatt, prtxpeim


     MUN-71295        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Personnel Settings, Employee Salary prsalnfy, prwssaln                                      The Personnel Settings program includes the
                                                               Notifications, Employee Salary                                                              Show Leading Zeros check box on the Position
                                                               Notifications (Web services)                                                                Control tab. The Length of Position Number list is
                                                                                                                                                           available; use this list to specify the total number of
                                                                                                                                                           digits to include in the position number when it is
                                                                                                                                                           displayed or printed.

     MUN-78318        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Position Budget Detail (link routine)   pmposbud                                            The position budget detail rebuild process
                                                                                                                                                           accounts for deductions that are not encumbered.


     MUN-72651        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Position Control                        pmposctl                                            If you enter a project account number and save the
                                                                                                                                                           record, the program allows you to update the
                                                                                                                                                           project account number when you re-enter the
                                                                                                                                                           program.
     MUN-66196        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Position Control                        pmposctl                                            If your organization uses the Full Account entry
                                                                                                                                                           mode for general ledger accounts, you must enter
                                                                                                                                                           a full and complete general ledger account number
                                                                                                                                                           when adding or updating position control records.
                                                                                                                                                           When you update any position control record that
                                                                                                                                                           currently contains a partial general ledger account
                                                                                                                                                           number, you must update the general ledger
                                                                                                                                                           account number to a full and complete number; this
                                                                                                                                                           update will be required when you update a position
                                                                                                                                                           control record for any reason.

     MUN-59876        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Position Control                        pmposctl                                            In Position Control and Position Inquiry, the GL
                                                                                                                                                           Account Find option is available to all users.
     MUN-68326        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Position Control                        pmposctl                                            The browse screen includes the Employee Name
                                                                                                                                                           and Employee Number (#) columns. If the number
                                                                                                                                                           of employees attached to a position is one, then
                                                                                                                                                           the name and employee number display; if the
                                                                                                                                                           number of employees attached to a position is
                                                                                                                                                           greater than one, the Employee Name column
                                                                                                                                                           displays "Multiple Employees."

     MUN-66181        1       Payroll - Personnel Management   Position Control                        pmposctl                                            The Budget Update process properly accounts for
                                                                                                                                                           multiple budget lines for the same account. It also
                                                                                                                                                           allows you to define the original, revised, and
                                                                                                                                                           projected budget levels, rather than always
                                                                                                                                                           assuming the original is budget level 1 and the
                                                                                                                                                           revised and projected are budget level 2.

     MUN-71435        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Position Control                        pmposctl                                            The Excel export correctly displays the full general
                                                                                                                                                           ledger account number for positions with an
                                                                                                                                                           allocation code and clears the general ledger
                                                                                                                                                           account value on records for which it does not
                                                                                                                                                           apply.
     MUN-73870        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Position Control                        pmposctl                                            The Mass Update proof report correctly displays all
                                                                                                                                                           job/salary pay records modified when processing
                                                                                                                                                           multiple positions.




58                                                                                             d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                                 (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program          Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                             Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                     Change Needed

     MUN-73304        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Time Entry               prtimatt                                           The default value for the project allocation or
                                                                                                                                           project account number for a pay being added
                                                                                                                                           using the Time Entry Detail screen is completed
                                                                                                                                           from the employee's base pay record if no
                                                                                                                                           allocation/account exists for that pay.

     MUN-70010        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Training Courses                                                            On the Main tab, the Allow Waitlist check box
                                                                                                                                           allows you to permit or restrict the use of a wait list
                                                                                                                                           for the course. This check box can only be cleared
                                                                                                                                           if there are no employees currently associated with
                                                                                                                                           the wait list.
     MUN-69730        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Training Courses                                                            On the Restrictions tab, the Disable Workflow and
                                                                                                                                           Restart Workflow check boxes are available. If no
                                                                                                                                           employees are enrolled in the course, use these
                                                                                                                                           check boxes to add or remove the workflow
                                                                                                                                           approval process for course enrollments.

     MUN-67477        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Training Courses         pmtrncrs, pmtrnemp, pmwstrnc                       The Close Wait List box identifies a wait list close
                                                                                                                                           date. This box is only accessible four courses that
                                                                                                                                           permit wait lists. If you enter a wait list close date,
                                                                                                                                           you cannot add employees to the wait list once the
                                                                                                                                           wait list closed date has elapsed.
                                                                                                                                           If an employee is added to the course prior to the
                                                                                                                                           specified wait list close date but not approved in
                                                                                                                                           workflow until after the close date, the employee
                                                                                                                                           will still be added to the wait list once approved.
                                                                                                                                           On the Course Details tab, the Target Audience
                                                                                                                                           box allows you to identify a group or skill set to
                                                                                                                                           which the course applies.
                                                                                                                                           When you click Find, the Available Seats box
                                                                                                                                           allows you to search on the number of seats
                                                                                                                                           available in the course, and the Prerequisites tab
                                                                                                                                           allows you to search according to defined
                                                                                                                                           prerequisites. These fields are only available when
                                                                                                                                           the Find option is active.


     MUN-69729        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Training Courses         pmtrncrs                                           The Mass Update screen includes the Send Email
                                                                                                                                           Updates to Supervisors and Send Email Updates
                                                                                                                                           to Trainer check boxes. When these check boxes
                                                                                                                                           are selected and the training course record is
                                                                                                                                           updated, the program sends an e-mail notification
                                                                                                                                           to the supervisor and trainer. The Additional Email
                                                                                                                                           Update Recipients boxes provides the option for
                                                                                                                                           adding up to two additional e-mail addresses, if
                                                                                                                                           necessary.

     MUN-71743        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Training Courses         pmtrncrs                                           The program clears the Course Information text
                                                                                                                                           when the associated training course is deleted.

     MUN-68329        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Training Courses         pmtrncrs                                           The program includes the Course Equivalents
                                                                                                                                           button on the Main tab. When you select this
                                                                                                                                           option, the program displays a list of equivalency
                                                                                                                                           codes associated with the current training course.
                                                                                                                                           (Equivalency codes are created and maintained in
                                                                                                                                           Payroll Miscellaneous Codes.) By attaching codes
                                                                                                                                           to courses, you can identify an equivalent
                                                                                                                                           relationship between courses.
                                                                                                                                           When you click Find, the Course Equivalents tab is
                                                                                                                                           available. This tab provides the option for using an
                                                                                                                                           equivalency code as search criteria.

     MUN-68108        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Training Courses         pmtrncrs                                           When the program verifies the Course Date value,
                                                                                                                                           the From and To dates are not reset.



59                                                                                d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                              (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                 Primary Program                       Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Change Needed

     MUN-63454        2       Payroll - Personnel Management   Training Courses                      pmtrncrs                                            When you add a record from the Wait List screen:
                                                                                                                                                         The verification message displays the date, time,
                                                                                                                                                         and sequence of the course to which you are
                                                                                                                                                         adding an employee.
                                                                                                                                                         The program updates the following fields with
                                                                                                                                                         course default values when an employee is added
                                                                                                                                                         to a course using the wait list: Hours, Hours Type,
                                                                                                                                                         Start/End Dates, and Cost.
                                                                                                                                                         The employee notification distributed by e-mail
                                                                                                                                                         includes the correct course dates.

     MUN-65227        3       Payroll - Personnel Management   Vacancy Report                        pmposvac                                            The report includes employees who are included in
                                                                                                                                                         Position Control records.
     MUN-65804        3       Payroll - State Specific         Create W-2c Tables, W-2c Electronic   prw2cgen, prw2cmag,                                 Create W-2 and 1099-R Records
                                                               File, Employee W-2c, Print W-2c       prw2cmnt, prw2cprt, prw2creg,                       The program accommodates the value of the
                                                               Forms, W-2c Register Report, W-2c     prw2crpt, prw2gens,                                 Corrected check box in the Employee 1099-R
                                                               Report, Create W-2 and 1099-R         prw2magm, prw2mnts,                                 program.
                                                               Records, Create Electronic File,      prw2pr99, prw2prnt, prw2regi,
                                                               Employee W-2 and 1099-R, Print        prw2wzrd, prws1099, prwselw2                        Create Electronic File, W-2c Electronic File
                                                               1099 Forms, W-2 Forms Print, W-2                                                          On the Employer Info tab, the PIN box is relabeled
                                                               and 1099-R Register, W-2                                                                  User ID.

                                                                                                                                                         Create W-2 and 1099-R Records, Create W-2c
                                                                                                                                                         Tables
                                                                                                                                                         (New York-specific)
                                                                                                                                                         The programs exclude records with obsolete
                                                                                                                                                         teacher records.

                                                                                                                                                         Create W-2 and 1099-R Records, W-2 Forms
                                                                                                                                                         Print, W-2 and 1099-R Register, Create Electronic
                                                                                                                                                         File, Employee W-2 and 1099-R, Create W-2c
                                                                                                                                                         Tables, W-2c Electronic File, Employee W-2c,
                                                                                                                                                         Print W-2c Forms
                                                                                                                                                         In Employee W-2, the Box 12 tab includes the
                                                                                                                                                         HIRE Wages amount box (labeled CC HIRE
                                                                                                                                                         Wages). The remaining programs accommodate
                                                                                                                                                         this field value. (HIRE: Hiring Incentives to Restore
                                                                                                                                                         Employment Act)

                                                                                                                                                         Employee W-2 and 1099-R
                                                                                                                                                         On the Employee W-2 screen, the Add and Delete
                                                                                                                                                         toolbar buttons are available:
                                                                                                                                                         • Use the Add button to add Form W-2s for
                                                                                                                                                         employees for whom records have already been
                                                                                                                                                         generated or to enter an original Form W-2 that
     MUN-62793        2       Payroll - State Specific         Disability and Unemployment Report    prdunrpt                                            The program generated (for example, the same
                                                                                                                                                         has not been factors excluded pays in an employee
                                                                                                                                                         manner as wages.
     MUN-72510        1       Payroll - State Specific         Disability and Unemployment Report    prdunrpt                                            The Total Wages column on the Quarterly
                                                                                                                                                         Unemployment Report prints employee wages
                                                                                                                                                         instead of asterisks when an amount exceeds
                                                                                                                                                         $99,999.99.
     MUN-66950        1       Payroll - State Specific         EEO-5 Report                          preeo5rp                                            In the report output, the No Schools and No
                                                                                                                                                         Annexes fields display up to four digits.
     MUN-67029        3       Payroll - State Specific         EEO-5 Report                          preeo5rp                                            When you view the Detail report as a PDF file, the
                                                                                                                                                         school information displays correctly.
                                                                                                                                                         When you click Browse on the Schools screen, the
                                                                                                                                                         program properly navigates to the selected school.




60                                                                                          d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                                (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module           Primary Program                     Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                          Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                       Change Needed

     MUN-62205        2       Payroll - State Specific   Employee Master, W-2 Forms Print,   prw2prnt, prmaster, prw2wzrd                       W-2 Processing programs provide the option for
                                                         W-2 Wizard                                                                             delivering annual W-2 Forms using electronic mail.
                                                                                                                                                In Employee Master, the W-2 Delivery list is
                                                                                                                                                available on the Payroll tab. This option allows you
                                                                                                                                                to select Print Only, Email Only, or Both Print and
                                                                                                                                                Email for W-2 delivery. If you select an e-mail
                                                                                                                                                option, a valid e-mail address for the employee
                                                                                                                                                must be entered on the Address tab.
                                                                                                                                                In the W-2 Forms Print program, the W-2 Form
                                                                                                                                                Number list includes the TYLXML - Tyler Forms W-
                                                                                                                                                2 option, which creates the form using an XML
                                                                                                                                                format that can be delivered by electronic mail. If
                                                                                                                                                your organization uses the W-2 Wizard, the W-2
                                                                                                                                                Form list in this program includes the TYLXML -
                                                                                                                                                Tyler Forms W-2 option.


     MUN-72773        1       Payroll - State Specific   Employee W-2 and 1099-R, 1099-R prw2cgen, prw2creg, prw2mnts,                          The screen names and menu names are
                                                         Forms Print, Create W-2c Records, W- prw2pr99                                          consistent: Employee W-2 and 1099-R, 1099-R
                                                         2c Register.                                                                           Forms Print, Create W-2c Records, and W-2c
                                                                                                                                                Register.
     MUN-77866        1       Payroll - State Specific   Employee W-2 and 1099-R, Create     prw2magm, prw2mnts                                 The programs accommodate year-end electronic
                                                         Electronic File                                                                        file changes for 2010.

     MUN-66539        1       Payroll - State Specific   MI ORS Retirement Report            prmisers                       Michigan            The Hybrid Plan DC deduction ranges are
                                                                                                                                                available to accommodate Hybrid Plan Defined
                                                                                                                                                Contributions. The program only creates DTL4
                                                                                                                                                records for employees who have amounts for
                                                                                                                                                hybrid contributions deductions.
     MUN-68343        1       Payroll - State Specific   MI ORS Retirement Report            prmisers                       Michigan            The Record Count in for the MI Bi-Weekly
                                                                                                                                                Retirement report electronic file footer record
                                                                                                                                                includes DTL3 and DTL4 records in positions 40-
                                                                                                                                                47. Additionally, footer record positions 144-155
                                                                                                                                                include the sum of hybrid employee contributions,
                                                                                                                                                and positions 156-167 include the sum of hybrid
                                                                                                                                                employer contributions. The sum of hybrid
                                                                                                                                                employee contributions has been removed from
                                                                                                                                                the sum in footer record positions 96-107 and sum
                                                                                                                                                of hybrid employer contributions removed from the
                                                                                                                                                sum in footer record positions 108-119.

     MUN-64338        2       Payroll - State Specific   MI Retirement Maintenance           prmisers                       Michigan            The New Hire Starting Less Than $18K check box
                                                                                                                                                is available. If selected, this check box indicates
                                                                                                                                                that the employee was hired after July 1, 2010 and
                                                                                                                                                is expected to earn less than $18,000.00.
                                                                                                                                                The program includes output for DTL4 records.
                                                                                                                                                The CST - Employee Status Change crosswalk
                                                                                                                                                option is available.

     MUN-79978        1       Payroll - State Specific   Print W-2c Forms                    prw2cprt                                           The program creates W-2c forms for employer
                                                                                                                                                identification number (EIN) corrections.
     MUN-78873        1       Payroll - State Specific   W-2 Electronic File                 prw2magm                                           The GAWMGTC W-2 electronic file format is
                                                                                                                                                correct.
     MUN-73438        0       Payroll - State Specific   W-2 Forms Print                     prw2prnt                                           The W-2 delivery method is correct in W-2 XML
                                                                                                                                                output.
     MUN-72681        1       Payroll - State Specific   W-2 Wizard                          prw2wzrd                                           The PIN boxes are relabeled User ID on the
                                                                                                                                                Electronic File tab.
                                                                                                                                                The default value for the base wage limit is the
                                                                                                                                                current year value.




61                                                                                   d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                             (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                       Primary Program                Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                                 Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Change Needed

     MUN-71938        3       Professional Services - Professional   Bill Import                    tnybilim                                         All File Layouts
                              Services                                                                                                               The Print Bills Missing on Import File and Print Bill
                                                                                                                                                     and Charge Detail on Separate Report check
                                                                                                                                                     boxes are available on the Bill Import screen.
                                                                                                                                                     If you select the Print Bills Missing on Import File
                                                                                                                                                     check box, the program includes all bills missing
                                                                                                                                                     on the import file in the report. When this check
                                                                                                                                                     box is selected, the program verifies that parcels
                                                                                                                                                     exist in the import file for all bills for a particular tax
                                                                                                                                                     year and cycle. If the program does not find a
                                                                                                                                                     match, it lists any discrepancies in the report a
                                                                                                                                                     section called BILL EXISTS - ERRORS. You can
                                                                                                                                                     include this section in the report for all import file
                                                                                                                                                     layouts.
                                                                                                                                                     If you select the Print Bill and Charge Detail on
                                                                                                                                                     Separate Report check box, the program creates
                                                                                                                                                     the BILL EXISTS WITH CHARGE DETAIL -
                                                                                                                                                     ERRORS report, a separate report that shows the
                                                                                                                                                     differences between an existing bill's charge
                                                                                                                                                     amounts and the imported charge amounts. You
                                                                                                                                                     can create this separate report for all import file
                                                                                                                                                     layouts.
                                                                                                                                                     The use of these check boxes may result in the
                                                                                                                                                     creation of one to three reports that all report
                                                                                                                                                     errors. Each report shows the number of errors
                                                                                                                                                     detected on each individual report. After
                                                                                                                                                     processing the import, the program includes the
                                                                                                                                                     accumulated errors for all reports in the Errors
                                                                                                                                                     Detected and Errors Printed boxes at the bottom of
                                                                                                                                                     the screen.

                                                                                                                                                     Albany County All Communities (albanyct) File
     MUN-60304        3       Professional Services - Professional   Check Reconciliation           apchkrcn                                         Layout Reconciliation contains a new output
                                                                                                                                                     Check
                              Services                                                                                                               format, JPP- JP Morgan Chase with Payee.

     MUN-61196        3       Professional Services - Professional   Employee Export                prempexp                                         The program includes the employee's job title and
                              Services                                                                                                               the last four digits of the Social Security number in
                                                                                                                                                     the export file.
     MUN-62015        3       Professional Services - Professional   Employee Groups                pmempgrp                                         The Import button is available. This option allows
                              Services                                                                                                               you to add or delete employees from a group by
                                                                                                                                                     importing a file. On the Generate screen, the
                                                                                                                                                     Calendar range is available for defining records.

     MUN-59070        3       Professional Services - Professional   Import Invoices                apinvimp                                         The Import Invoices program contains a new
                              Services                                                                                                               format, Third Party. This format is used for specific
                                                                                                                                                     custom layouts used by Eau Claire, WI.

     MUN-72795        3       Professional Services - Professional   New Assets                     famstmnt                                         The Copy function now copies purchase
                              Services                                                                                                               information.
     MUN-61127        3       Professional Services - Professional   Payroll Allocations            prallmnt                                         The Mass Update button is available. Once you
                              Services                                                                                                               have created an active set of records, click Mass
                                                                                                                                                     Update to change values for all records at one
                                                                                                                                                     time.
     MUN-60298        3       Professional Services - Professional   Payroll Check Register         prchkreg                                         The electronic file format PUB - People's United
                              Services                                                                                                               Bank is available.
     MUN-59018        3       Professional Services - Professional   Payroll Check Register         prchkreg                                         The electronic file output format for Webster Bank
                              Services                                                                                                               is available.
     MUN-63278        3       Professional Services - Professional   Payroll Check Register         prchkreg                                         The Payroll Check Register includes the amount
                              Services                                                                                                               without a decimal for the SC - Sonoma County
                                                                                                                                                     electronic file option.
     MUN-68091        3       Professional Services - Professional   Payroll Check Register         prchkreg                                         The program accommodates the Bank of America,
                              Services                                                                                                               Chesapeake, electronic file format.
     MUN-71851        2       Professional Services - Professional   Purchase Card Import           apimpnet                                         The program now sets the wire number to a valid
                              Services                                                                                                               check number, not zero.



62                                                                                            d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                                (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                       Primary Program                        Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Change Needed

     MUN-62563        3       Professional Services - Professional   Reset MSS Passwords                    spesspwd                                         The Reset MSS Passwords program is available.
                              Services                                                                                                                       This program allows you to change a user's
                                                                                                                                                             Employee Self Service password to the last four
                                                                                                                                                             digits of his or her Social Security number.

     MUN-71485        3       Special Products                       Payroll Detail Proof, Employee         spxmlrpt_saxfilt1.4gl                            The Payroll Detail Proof and Employee Accrual
                                                                     Accruals                                                                                reports properly display in the PDF format.
     MUN-64321        2       Special Products                       PDF                                                                                     When a report contains the maximum number of
                                                                                                                                                             records allowed for a single page, you are able to
                                                                                                                                                             generate the report as a PDF without the process
                                                                                                                                                             failing.
     MUN-66195        2       Special Products - CSS                 MSS - Citizen Administration                                                            The Formula for Bills Pay By Date fields are
                                                                                                                                                             available on the Administration > Citizen
                                                                                                                                                             Administration > Application page. Use these fields
                                                                                                                                                             to create the formula for the calculation of the pay-
                                                                                                                                                             by date. Create the formula by selecting the bill-
                                                                                                                                                             based date (bill, due, interest, or penalty date) and
                                                                                                                                                             the mathematical operation (plus or minus), and by
                                                                                                                                                             typing the number of days (0 - 30) to add or
                                                                                                                                                             subtract from the bill-based date.
                                                                                                                                                             The default value for the pay-by date is Interest
                                                                                                                                                             Date minus 1 day.

     MUN-75271        2       Special Products - CSS                 MSS - Citizen Administration                                                            When you click Link to Account next to Personal
                                                                                                                                                             Property Accounts on the Administration > User
                                                                                                                                                             Administration > Citizen Administration page, the
                                                                                                                                                             program successfully displays the Personal
                                                                                                                                                             Property Account Link Setup page where you can
                                                                                                                                                             type the property ID for the personal property
                                                                                                                                                             account link. If you click Cancel, the program
                                                                                                                                                             closes the page and returns to the Citizen
                                                                                                                                                             Administration page.
     MUN-71896        3       Special Products - ESS                 ESS - Applicant Interest Card                                                           The Date of Birth and Gender fields are not
                                                                                                                                                             included on the Applicant Interest Card.
     MUN-69610        3       Special Products - ESS                 ESS - Benefits                                                                          The Detail screen displays correctly.
     MUN-71027        3       Special Products - ESS                 ESS - Employment Opportunities                                                          For each job on the Employment Opportunities
                                                                                                                                                             pages, the Position (a number) and Description
                                                                                                                                                             details display. These details only display when
                                                                                                                                                             the Title/Description and Position check boxes are
                                                                                                                                                             selected on the MSS Field Access tab in the
                                                                                                                                                             Applicant Processing Settings program, and when
                                                                                                                                                             there are position or description values to display.


     MUN-57805        2       Special Products - ESS                 ESS - Employment Opportunities                                                          For RSS feeds, if a job application does not
                                                                                                                                                             include an Apply link, the program links to the
                                                                                                                                                             current job lists.
     MUN-64274        2       Special Products - ESS                 ESS - Employment Opportunities                                                          The program displays job opportunities by
                                                                                                                                                             requisition in ascending order.
     MUN-62402        1       Special Products - ESS                 ESS - Employment Opportunities                                                          When you upload a document using Tyler Content
                                                                                                                                                             Manager for Munis, the Applicant Profile page
                                                                                                                                                             correctly includes the document as an attachment.

     MUN-67914        3       Special Products - ESS                 ESS - My Training                                                                       The Training History screen includes a Total Hours
                                                                                                                                                             value.
     MUN-70863        3       Special Products - ESS                 ESS - Pay/Tax Information                                                               Employees can add and edit direct deposit
                                                                                                                                                             accounts.
     MUN-70982        3       Special Products - ESS                 ESS - Pay/Tax Information                                                               For Form W-2, Box 12 details include CC HIRE
                                                                                                                                                             Exempt Wages/Tips amounts. This reports wages
                                                                                                                                                             that fall under the 2010 HIRE (Hiring Incentives to
                                                                                                                                                             Restore Employment) Act. It is valid for tax year
                                                                                                                                                             2010 only.
                                                                                                                                                             For 1099-R, the Corrected check box is selected if
                                                                                                                                                             the details represent corrected information.



63                                                                                                    d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                          (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module                Primary Program                      Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                              Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                               Change Needed

     MUN-66446        3       Special Products - ESS          ESS - Pay/Tax Information                                                             On the Paycheck Simulator page, the Deduction
                                                                                                                                                    Cycle list is available. The default value for this list
                                                                                                                                                    is one (1), which is the current pay cycle. Use this
                                                                                                                                                    list to create paycheck simulations for a pay cycle
                                                                                                                                                    that is not the current pay cycle.

     MUN-74109        1       Special Products - ESS          ESS - Pay/Tax Information                                                             The Direct Deposits page displays a message
                                                                                                                                                    when you delete primary accounts.
                                                                                                                                                    The Bank list includes the bank routing number.
                                                                                                                                                    The Account Number box is limited to 17
                                                                                                                                                    characters of text.

     MUN-70548        1       Special Products - ESS          ESS - Pay/Tax Information                                                             The program displays the following message
                                                                                                                                                    below the Marital Status list for the first W-4
                                                                                                                                                    section on the W-4 Edit page: "If you are married
                                                                                                                                                    but would like to withhold at the higher single rate,
                                                                                                                                                    select Single."
     MUN-72712        3       Special Products - ESS          ESS - Pay/Tax Information                                                             The Salary Notification page includes the Total
                                                                                                                                                    Compensation report.
     MUN-72404        2       Special Products - ESS          ESS - Pay/Tax Information                                                             When the View W-4 check box is not selected on
                                                                                                                                                    the MSS Employee Administration page, the ESS
                                                                                                                                                    Pay/Tax Information panel does not include W-4
                                                                                                                                                    details.
     MUN-71288        2       Special Products - ESS          MSS - Administration                                                                  The password regeneration process resets the
                                                                                                                                                    number of failed login attempts when it
                                                                                                                                                    regenerates the password.
     MUN-63109        1       Special Products - Laserfiche   Laserfiche                                                                            You are able to submit multi-page .tiff files to
                                                                                                                                                    Laserfiche from Munis.
     MUN-64121        3       Special Products - MSS          ESS - Applicant Profile              MSS applicant profile                            The Announcements section correctly displays the
                                                                                                                                                    Applicant Profile message.
     MUN-68695        2       Special Products - MSS          ESS - Applicant Profile                                                               The Applicant Profile page includes the Date of
                                                                                                                                                    First Application and Date of Last Profile Update
                                                                                                                                                    labels.
     MUN-68269        2       Special Products - MSS          ESS - Applicant Profile                                                               The View option for application summaries for jobs
                                                                                                                                                    for which an applicant has already applied is not
                                                                                                                                                    available.
     MUN-67917        2       Special Products - MSS          ESS - Employee Opportunities                                                          In the Certification and License Information group
                                                                                                                                                    for the Applicant Profile, the Level list displays the
                                                                                                                                                    correct options according to the Type Code and
                                                                                                                                                    Area Code values selected.
     MUN-68662        1       Special Products - MSS          ESS - Employee Profile                                                                When an employee updates his or her e-mail
                                                                                                                                                    address, the program sends a notification of the
                                                                                                                                                    change to the Human Resources department.

     MUN-58911        3       Special Products - MSS          ESS - Employee Profile and Time Off presence.js                                       If the Office Communicator is not installed or a
                                                                                                                                                    person is not signed in, the Presence Control
                                                                                                                                                    indicator displays and if you hover your mouse
                                                                                                                                                    over the indicator, the Presence Indicator menu is
                                                                                                                                                    available.
     MUN-63462        1       Special Products - MSS          ESS - Employment Opportunities                                                        Employee Opportunities allows applicants who are
                                                                                                                                                    currently logged-in to view the RSS feed.
     MUN-66884        2       Special Products - MSS          ESS - Employment Opportunities                                                        Job application summary text wraps and displays
                                                                                                                                                    correctly.
     MUN-63338        2       Special Products - MSS          ESS - Employment Opportunities                                                        Job applications distributed as attachments follow
                                                                                                                                                    the defined style sheet.
     MUN-65599        2       Special Products - MSS          ESS - Employment Opportunities                                                        On the summary pages of jobs for which an
                                                                                                                                                    applicant has applied, check boxes display
                                                                                                                                                    correctly.
     MUN-73284        2       Special Products - MSS          ESS - Employment Opportunities       atwsappl                                         The Job Application Summary page displays the
                                                                                                                                                    label and data for the TEXTLBL and TEXTHDR
                                                                                                                                                    fields.
     MUN-67018        1       Special Products - MSS          ESS - Time Entry                                                                      When you enter time by shift, the options include
                                                                                                                                                    an end-time of midnight (12:00 a.m.).
     MUN-59093        1       Special Products - MSS          ESS - Time Sheet Approval                                                             If you are a supervisor approving time sheets for
                                                                                                                                                    employees, you can move past (skip) a time sheet
                                                                                                                                                    entry that you are not approving.

64                                                                                           d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                             (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module         Primary Program                      Affected Program(s)          Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                            Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                      Change Needed

     MUN-64597        2       Special Products - MSS   MSS - Administration, ESS - Pay/Tax wbsecure                                          On the Employee Administration Application
                                                       Information                                                                           Settings page in MSS Administration, the Display
                                                                                                                                             Last Months of Check Stubs box controls the
                                                                                                                                             information that displays on the Pay/Tax
                                                                                                                                             Information page in ESS:
                                                                                                                                             • If the value of the Display Last Months of Check
                                                                                                                                             Stubs is 0 or -1, the Pay/Tax Information displays
                                                                                                                                             the Year list from which an employee can select a
                                                                                                                                             single year for which to view pay/tax information.
                                                                                                                                             • If the value of the Display Last Months of Check
                                                                                                                                             Stubs box is 1, the Year list is not available and the
                                                                                                                                             Pay/Tax Information displays only those pay
                                                                                                                                             checks with pay dates that fall within the current
                                                                                                                                             month.
                                                                                                                                             • If the value of the Display Last Months of Check
                                                                                                                                             Stubs box is greater than 1, the Year list is not
                                                                                                                                             available and the Pay/Tax Information displays
                                                                                                                                             only those pay checks with pay dates that fall
                                                                                                                                             within the number of months specified. (For
                                                                                                                                             example, if the value of the Display Last Months of
                                                                                                                                             Check Stubs is 24, the Pay/Tax Information
                                                                                                                                             displays pay check details for the last 24 months.)




     MUN-69619        3       Special Products - MSS   MSS - Administration-Exceptions                                                       If your organization is running Microsoft IIS 7, the
                                                                                                                                             XML exception logs are no longer available using
                                                                                                                                             HTTP. The Exceptions page in MSS
                                                                                                                                             Administration is still available for system
                                                                                                                                             administrators.
     MUN-65840        3       Special Products - MSS   MSS - Citizen Administration                                                          The Allow Viewing of Liens check box is available
                                                                                                                                             on the Citizen Administration > Real Estate Tax
                                                                                                                                             page. If you select this check box, it allows
                                                                                                                                             customers to view lien bill details for liened parcels
                                                                                                                                             on the Lien View page. If a property has an
                                                                                                                                             outstanding lien, the program displays the Lien link
                                                                                                                                             under Paid on the All Bills page, and displays lien
                                                                                                                                             message links to the lien bill on the View Bill and
                                                                                                                                             Property Detail pages. If the customer selects to
                                                                                                                                             view a lien bill, the Lien View link is available
                                                                                                                                             under Real Estate Property Taxes in the
                                                                                                                                             navigational pane.
                                                                                                                                             The Allow Payments for Liened Parcels check box
                                                                                                                                             is available on the Citizen Administration >
                                                                                                                                             Payments page for the Real Estate application
                                                                                                                                             category. If you select this check box, it allows
                                                                                                                                             customers to make payments on lien bills.


     MUN-35111        1       Special Products - MSS   MSS - General                                                                         The program returns the correct Munis ID when
                                                                                                                                             your MSS system is set to use single-sign on.
     MUN-72341        2       Special Products - MSS   MSS - Hosting-System Configuration                                                    The program does not erase a stored password
                                                                                                                                             value when you click Test.
                                                                                                                                             The program displays the following text when a
                                                                                                                                             password value exists: "Password is stored but
                                                                                                                                             hidden for security".
                                                                                                                                             When you successfully update the values on this
                                                                                                                                             screen, the program displays a confirmation
                                                                                                                                             message.
     MUN-69466        3       Special Products - MSS   MSS - User Administration            spwssecr                                         The program returns results when you search for
                                                                                                                                             users by entering a partial name.
     MUN-61638        2       Special Products - MSS   MSS - User Administration                                                             The program successfully displays the
                                                                                                                                             Administration > User Administration page when
                                                                                                                                             the Administrators check box is cleared.

     MUN-72972        2       Special Products - MSS   MSS - User Administration            wbsecure                                         The user ID is no longer restricted to alphanumeric
                                                                                                                                             characters only.
65                                                                                    d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                           (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module             Primary Program                     Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                           Change Needed

     MUN-64016        2       Special Products - MSS       MSS - User Administration                                                               When you select the Show Employees in This
                                                                                                                                                   Department option, the program uses the
                                                                                                                                                   department in the Employee Master record to
                                                                                                                                                   select employees.
     MUN-58736        2       Special Products - MSS       MSS - User Passwords                                                                    When you are changing your password and the
                                                                                                                                                   change is not accepted by the system, the program
                                                                                                                                                   displays a message that includes possible reasons
                                                                                                                                                   why the change was not accepted.

     MUN-66070        3       Special Products - MSS       MSS Administration, ESS -                                                               The Employee Administration page within MSS
                                                           Employment Opportunities                                                                Administration includes the Allow Applicant
                                                                                                                                                   Interest Cards check box. If this check box is
                                                                                                                                                   selected, the Employment Opportunities page
                                                                                                                                                   includes the "If you would like to be notified when
                                                                                                                                                   new jobs are posted, register here" link, which
                                                                                                                                                   provides the applicant interest form for completion;
                                                                                                                                                   if this check box is not selected, the Register Here
                                                                                                                                                   statement does not display.

     MUN-68408        1       Special Products - TylerCM   Attach, Tyler Content Manager for   spattach, spwstycm, sptylrcm,                       After you select the file to attach, the program
                                                           Munis                               sptcmdoc                                            provides the option to set the document to Private
                                                                                                                                                   or Public.
     MUN-68000        2       SP-Tech - ME Programs        Menu                                mewsusrm                                            When you access the Centrals menu through the
                                                                                                                                                   mewsusrm_getCentralsMenu Web service, the
                                                                                                                                                   menu reflects your most recent menu permissions.

     MUN-73336        1       SP-Tech - ME Programs        Organize Favorites                  mefavort                                            You are able to delete favorite programs without
                                                                                                                                                   an error occurring.
     MUN-70581        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines        Crystal Reports Views               spallvws                                            The gl_char_code and gl_parameters view are
                                                                                                                                                   available.
                                                                                                                                                   The following columns have been added to the
                                                                                                                                                   wm_detail view:
                                                                                                                                                   t4.wmcl_code AS cl_class_code
                                                                                                                                                   t4.wmcl_sh_desc AS cl_class_code_desc_sh
                                                                                                                                                   t4.wmcl_desc AS cl_class_code_desc
     MUN-68023        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines        Crystal Reports Views               spallvws                                            The glbm_desc column has been added to the
                                                                                                                                                   GL_budget view.
     MUN-67904        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines        Crystal Reports Views               spallvws                                            The prdb_benefit as db_benefits_flag field has
                                                                                                                                                   been added to the pr_deduction_den view.
     MUN-72829        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines        Crystal Reports Views               spallvws                                            The prjb_calndr column from the prjobcls table is
                                                                                                                                                   available for the pr_job_pay view.
     MUN-50503        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines        Customizable Field Labels           spforupd                                            You are able to use the Customizable Field Labels
                                                                                                                                                   program to change text edit fields to automatically
                                                                                                                                                   upshift the entered text, without the user turning on
                                                                                                                                                   Caps Lock or pressing the Shift key. The Force
                                                                                                                                                   Uppercase (Standard) column on the Standard
                                                                                                                                                   Screen Item tab displays the original setting for the
                                                                                                                                                   field; the Force Uppercase (Modified) column
                                                                                                                                                   displays the new setting for the field.

     MUN-60741        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines        E-mail                              spgdclib                                            When you create an e-mail message from a
                                                                                                                                                   program, the CC and BCC fields in the e-mail
                                                                                                                                                   message are available.
     MUN-62658        1       SP-Tech - SP Routines        Excel                               spxexcel                                            The Export to Excel functionality works correctly if
                                                                                                                                                   your organization does not use the Tyler
                                                                                                                                                   Dashboard.
     MUN-63673        1       SP-Tech - SP Routines        Export to Excel                     spxexcel                                            Hyperlinks are correctly exported to Microsoft
                                                                                                                                                   Excel.
     MUN-74595        2       SP-Tech - SP Routines        Munis Office                        spoffice                                            The text and hyperlink data exported to Microsoft®
                                                                                                                                                   Excel or Microsoft Word is clipped in order to
                                                                                                                                                   remove any trailing spaces that may exist in the
                                                                                                                                                   data.




66                                                                                       d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                             (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module        Primary Program                     Affected Program(s)             Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                            Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                       Change Needed

     MUN-55399        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines   Munis Scheduler Monitor Service     MunisSchedulerMonitorService.                       The Munis Scheduler Monitor Service (SMS) is
                                                                                          exe, MunisSchedulerMgr.exe,                         available. This service executes the Munis
                                                                                          spwssked, mescheng                                  Scheduler Engine, which is a 4GL application. This
                                                                                                                                              service does not require a dedicated scheduler
                                                                                                                                              PC, and it is installed on the Munis application
                                                                                                                                              server. The service can be started whenever the
                                                                                                                                              computer is booted and does not require a logged-
                                                                                                                                              in user to function. Also, this service does not
                                                                                                                                              require a VShell license.
                                                                                                                                              The SMS comes with a Munis Scheduler Monitor
                                                                                                                                              Manager (SMM) application that you can use to
                                                                                                                                              configure, start, and stop the service.
                                                                                                                                              The SMS is an optional service. All existing
                                                                                                                                              Scheduler functionality remains unchanged and
                                                                                                                                              available.

     MUN-72707        2       SP-Tech - SP Routines   Roles                               sprolelb                                            If a role does not have access to a particular
                                                                                                                                              module, the data access permissions for that
                                                                                                                                              module are set to None.
     MUN-65225        2       SP-Tech - SP Routines   Roles                               sprolemt                                            When you are updating the menu security for a
                                                                                                                                              role, the option position letters continue to display
                                                                                                                                              in the # column on the Menu Security Tab.

     MUN-71039        2       SP-Tech - SP Routines   Roles                               rbacupdate.xml                                      When your user account has a role that has an idle
                                                                                                                                              time of Disabled and another role with an enabled
                                                                                                                                              idle time, the program uses the idle time of
                                                                                                                                              Disabled when calculating your permissions.

     MUN-73513        2       SP-Tech - SP Routines   Roles                                                                                   You are able to effectively secure all menu options.

     MUN-61681        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines   Roles - Accounts Receivable Roles   rbacupdate.xml                                      The Maintain AR Parameter Record check box on
                                                                                                                                              the Accounts Receivable Roles screen is now
                                                                                                                                              called Maintain AR Settings.
     MUN-69194        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines   Site Settings                       sprelnot, spscfgmt                                  The options on the Enhancement Viewer Access
                                                                                                                                              list are as follows:
                                                                                                                                              -Disallow from Applications - When you select this
                                                                                                                                              option, the enhancement viewer functionality is not
                                                                                                                                              active. The light bulb icon on the toolbar is grayed
                                                                                                                                              out, and when you click the icon, the program
                                                                                                                                              displays a message stating that you should see
                                                                                                                                              your system administrator to turn this functionality
                                                                                                                                              on.
                                                                                                                                              -Remove from Applications - When you select this
                                                                                                                                              option, the enhancement viewer functionality is not
                                                                                                                                              active and the light bulb icon is not available on the
                                                                                                                                              toolbar at all.
                                                                                                                                              -Allow from Applications, but Turn Off the
                                                                                                                                              Unviewed Items Indicator - When you select this
                                                                                                                                              option, the enhancement viewer functionality is
                                                                                                                                              active, but the light bulb icon is not highlighted
                                                                                                                                              when there is new enhancement information
                                                                                                                                              available for the program.
                                                                                                                                              -Allow from Applications - When you select this
                                                                                                                                              option, the enhancement viewer functionality is
                                                                                                                                              active, and the light bulb icon on the toolbar is
                                                                                                                                              highlighted when there is new enhancement
                                                                                                                                              information available for the program.



     MUN-66891        0       SP-Tech - SP Routines   Text Editor                         sptxtedt                                            The Display as HTML button is available. When
                                                                                                                                              you click this button, the program display the text
                                                                                                                                              from the main text screen in read only mode and
                                                                                                                                              applied any HTML formatting, if applicable. The
                                                                                                                                              main text screen only displays the plain text.


67                                                                                 d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                               (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module         Primary Program                     Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                         Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                    Change Needed

     MUN-72454        3       SP-Tech - SP Routines    Text Editor                         sptxtedt                                           When you are using the MDI menu type and you
                                                                                                                                              select Output from the File menu on a Text screen,
                                                                                                                                              the program displays the Output screen in front of
                                                                                                                                              the Text screen, allowing you to continue creating
                                                                                                                                              the output.
     MUN-60593        2       SP-Tech - SP Routines    Tyler Dashboard                     spstmenu                                           The Munis menu includes the Crystal Report
                                                                                                                                              options.
     MUN-76953        1       SP-Tech - SP Routines    User Attributes                     sprolelb, sprousrm                                 When you run the Reset Files functionality in User
                                                                                                                                              Attributes, Workflow business rules with an
                                                                                                                                              approver of Runtime are not deleted. If a Workflow
                                                                                                                                              business rule is deleted by this process, an audit
                                                                                                                                              record is created.
     MUN-71354        3       SP-Tech - Web Services   Site Settings, Web Services         wsextres, spconfig, spscfgmt                       The Web Services Connections program is no
                                                       Connections                                                                            longer available. The functionality associated with
                                                                                                                                              this program is now available on the External
                                                                                                                                              Resources tab in the Site Settings program.

     MUN-65792        2       SP-Tech - Web Services   Workflow                            wffwdxml, sprolelb                                 When you begin forwarding Workflow items from
                                                                                                                                              the My Work Web part or from Workflow Assistant,
                                                                                                                                              the program records your correct user ID in the
                                                                                                                                              audit entry.
     MUN-61830        3       SP-Tech - Workflow       User Attributes                     wffwdmov                                           The program does not display an error message
                                                                                                                                              when you demote a Workflow approver.

     MUN-73078        1       SP-Tech - Workflow       Workflow                            wfgenpe3                                           When a workflow is defined such that a GLO-GL
                                                                                                                                              Org Code approval comes before a SEG-GL
                                                                                                                                              Segment approval, a pending action for the SEG
                                                                                                                                              approval is correctly generated, when necessary.

     MUN-62159        2       SP-Tech - Workflow       Workflow                            wfpenxml                                           When you select an item in Workflow Assistant or
                                                                                                                                              on the My Work Web part and the item has a
                                                                                                                                              display program defined, the display program
                                                                                                                                              opens correctly.
     MUN-65325        2       SP-Tech - Workflow       Workflow                            wffwdmov                                           When you stop forwarding Workflow items for a
                                                                                                                                              user, the program does not display an error
                                                                                                                                              message and forwarding is effectively stopped.
     MUN-73990        2       SP-Tech - Workflow       Workflow - Project Journal          wfgenpe3, wfbrlmnt                                 Workflow items are correctly generated when you
                                                       Entry/Proof                                                                            are processing journal entries in Project Journal
                                                                                                                                              Entry/Proof.
     MUN-62244        2       SP-Tech - Workflow       Workflow Assistant                  wfactpe3                                           The log-in version of Workflow assistant
                                                                                                                                              acknowledges notifications.
                                                                                                                                              When you place an item on hold, only one
                                                                                                                                              notification is sent to the originator.
     MUN-72880        2       SP-Tech - Workflow       Workflow Business Rules             wfbrlmnt, wffwdmov, sprousrm                       The program correctly copies business rules when
                                                                                                                                              you use the Mass Change Approvals button to
                                                                                                                                              copy business rules.
                                                                                                                                              You are able to make changes to business rules
                                                                                                                                              that differ only in the Reason Code field.
                                                                                                                                              The scroll bars for the Approvers and Roles fields
                                                                                                                                              display correctly.
                                                                                                                                              The program does not display an error message
                                                                                                                                              when you are navigating in the Business Rule
                                                                                                                                              Ranges fields when maintaining a project segment
                                                                                                                                              range for a PES-PA Segment (Expense) approval
                                                                                                                                              type rule.
                                                                                                                                              The program does not close when you change the
                                                                                                                                              rule type on an existing rule.
     MUN-62650        2       SP-Tech - Workflow       Workflow Business Rules             wfbrlmnt                                           The program does not close completely when you
                                                                                                                                              close the Find Business Rules screen.
     MUN-63801        2       SP-Tech - Workflow       Workflow Business Rules             wfbrlmnt                                           You are able to search for business rules by
                                                                                                                                              approver ID.




68                                                                                   d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                          (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)
     Work Ticket   Priority   Product - Module     Primary Program                      Affected Program(s)            Affected State(s)   Release Notes                                           Possible Configuration
                                                                                                                                                                                                   Change Needed

     MUN-73292        2       SP-Tech - Workflow   Workflow, Web Services               wsconfig, wssecure, sprousrm                       If you are a Workflow approver, you automatically
                                                                                                                                           have access to all private Workflow Web services.
                                                                                                                                           When you change a Workflow Web service from
                                                                                                                                           public to private in the Web Service program, all
                                                                                                                                           Workflow approvers automatically have access to
                                                                                                                                           the private Web service.

     MUN-70607        2       Tax                  Bill Adjustments                     txblgnmt                                           If you conduct a search for records and the
                                                                                                                                           program finds over 1000 records, it displays a
                                                                                                                                           confirmation message for which you can choose
                                                                                                                                           whether or not to continue with the display of the
                                                                                                                                           entire set of records. If you click No, the program
                                                                                                                                           successfully cancels the creation of the record set
                                                                                                                                           and does not display another message. If you click
                                                                                                                                           Yes, the program displays all records found and
                                                                                                                                           displays the correct count of the records in the set.


     MUN-71827        1       Tax                  Generate Accounts Receivable         txglpostbu                                         If an AR code is set up with an accounting method
                                                                                                                                           of Accrual and the Generate AR program is
                                                                                                                                           processing a charge with a calculation code of 02
                                                                                                                                           (Fixed amount from charge code), the program
                                                                                                                                           successfully processes and posts this charge.




69                                                                                d722bd03-45ca-466c-932d-0a934f845332.xls                                                                            (Tyler Technologies, Inc.)

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Tags:
Stats:
views:0
posted:4/20/2012
language:
pages:69